PCRED301005EN_1-Couv_2004.FM Page 4 Vendredi, 23.

juillet 2004 1:59 13

Electrical network protection

Sepam series 20

User’s manual

2004
 YFJYVIIVGIT

6FKQHLGHU(OHFWULF )55(9$
PCRED301005EN_0-TDM_2004.FM Page 1 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:42 14

Contents

Sepam series 20
1

Metering functions 2

Protection functions 3

Control and monitoring functions

4

Modbus communication
5

Installation
6

Use
7

1
PCRED301005EN_0-TDM_2004.FM Page 2 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:42 14

2
PCRED301005EN_1-intro_2004TDM.fm Page 1 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:41 14

Sepam series 20 Contents

Presentation 1/2
Selection table 1/3
Electrical characteristics 1/4
1
Environmental characteristics 1/5

1/1
 PCRED301005EN_1-intro_2004.FM Page 2 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:41 14

Sepam series 20 Presentation

The Sepam series 20 family of protection and metering units is designed for the
operation of machines and electrical distribution networks of industrial installations
PE50297

1 and utility substations for all levels of voltage.

The Sepam series 20 family consists of simple, high-performing solutions, suited to
demanding applications that call for current and voltage metering.

Sepam series 20 selection guide by application

Selection criteria Series 20
Measurements I U U
Specific protection functions Loss of mains
(ROCOF)
Applications
Substation S20
Transformer T20
Motor M20
Busbar B21 B22
Sepam a modular solution.
Main functions
Protection
b Overcurrent and earth fault protection with adjustable time reset and with switching
from on setting group to the other controlled by a logic order.
PE50298

b Earth fault protection insensitivity to transformer switching.

b Detection of phase unbalance.
b RMS thermal protection which takes into account external operating temperature
and ventilation operating rates.
b Rate of change of frequency protection (ROCOF), for a fast and reliable
disconnection.
Communication
Sepam is totally compatible with the Modbus communication standard.
All the data needed for centralized equipment management from a remote
monitoring and control system are available via the Modbus communication port:
b reading: all measurements, alarms, protection settings,...
b writing: breaking device remote control orders,...
Diagnosis
3 types of diagnosis data for improved operation:
b network and machine diagnosis: tripping current, unbalance ratio, disturbance
recording
b switchgear diagnosis: cumulative breaking current, operating time
Sepam with basic UMI and with fixed advanced UMI. b diagnosis of the protection unit and additional modules: continuous self-testing,
watchdog.
Control and monitoring
Circuit breaker program logic ready to use, requiring no auxiliary relays or additional
wiring.

User Machine Interface

PE50299

2 levels of User Machine Interface (UMI) are available according to the user’s needs:
b basic UMI:
an economical solution for installations that do not require local operation (run via a
remote monitoring and control system)
b fixed or remote advanced UMI:
a graphic LCD display and 9-key keypad are used to display the measurement and
diagnosis values, alarm and operating messages and provide access to protection
and parameter setting values, for installations that are operated locally.

Setting and operating software

The SFT2841 PC software tool gives access to all the Sepam functions, with all the
facilities and convenience provided by a Windows type environment.

Example of an SFT2841 software screen.

1/2
PCRED301005EN_1-intro_2004.FM Page 3 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:41 14

Sepam series 20 Selection table

Functions Type of
Sepam

Protections ANSI code

Substation
S20
Transformer
T20
Motor
M20
Busbar
B21 (3) B22 1
Phase overcurrent (1) 50/51 4 4 4
Earth fault 50N/51N 4 4 4
Sensitive earth fault (1) 50G/51G
Negative sequence / unbalance 46 1 1 1
Thermal overload 49 RMS 2 2
Phase undercurrent 37 1
Excessive starting time, locked rotor 48/51LR/14 1
Starts per hour 66 1
Positive sequence undervoltage 27D/47 2 2
Remanent undervoltage 27R 1 1
Phase-to-phase undervoltage 27 2 2
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage 27S 1 1
Maximum de tension composée 59 2 2
Phase-to-phase overvoltage 59N 2 2
Underfrequency 81L 2 2
Overfrequency 81H 1 1
Rate of change of frequency 81R 1
Recloser (4 cycles) 79 v
Thermostat / Buchholz 26/63 v
Temperature monitoring (8 RTDs, 2 set points per sensor) 38/49T v v
Metering
Phase current I1,I2,I3 RMS, residual current I0 b b b
Average current I1, I2, I3, peak demand current IM1,IM2,IM3 b b b
Line voltage U21, U32, U13 b b
Phase-to-neutral voltage V1, V2, V3 b b
Residual voltage V0 b b
Positive sequence voltage / rotation direction b b
Frequency b b
Temperature v v
Network and machine diagnosis
Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3, TripI0 b b b
Unbalance ratio / negative sequence current Ii b b b
Running hours counter / operating time b b
Thermal capacity used b b
Remaining operating time before b b
overload tripping
Waiting time after overload tripping b b
Starting current and time / overload b
Start inhibit time delay, b
number of starts before inhibition
Disturbance recording b b b b b
Switchgear diagnostic
Cumulative breaking current b b b
Trip circuit supervision v v v v v
Number of operations, operating time, charging time v v v
Control and monitoring ANSI code
Circuit breaker / contactor control (2) 94/69 v v v v v
Latching / acknowledgment 86 b b b b b
Logic discrimination (1) 68 v v v
Switching of groups of settings (1) b b b
Annunciation 30 b b b b b
Additional modules
MET148-2 module - 8 temperature sensor inputs v v
MSA141 module - 1 low level analog output v v v v v
MES114 module or MES114E module or MES114F module- (10I/4O) v v v v v
ACE949-2 module (2-wire) or ACE959 (4-wire) RS 485 interface or ACE937 v v v v v
optical fibre interface
b standard, v according to parameter setting and MES114 or MET148-2 input/output module options.
(1) 4 relays with the exclusive possibility of logic discrimination or switching from one 2-relay group of settings to another 2-relay group (exclusive choice).
(2) For shunt trip unit or undervoltage release coil according to parameter setting.
(3) Performs Sepam B20 functions.

1/3
 PCRED301005EN_1-intro_2004.FM Page 4 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:41 14

Sepam series 20 Electrical characteristics

Analog inputs
Current transformer input impedance < 0.001 Ω

1 1 A or 5 A CT (with CCA630)
1 A to 6250 A ratings
consumption < 0.001 VA at 1 A
< 0.025 VA at 5 A
permanent thermal withstand 3 In
1 second overload 100 In
Voltage transformer input impedance > 100 kΩ
220 V to 250 kV ratings input voltage 100 to 230/√3 V
permanent thermal withstand 230 V
1 second overload 480 V
Temperature sensor input
Type of temperature sensor Pt 100 Ni 100 / 120
Isolation from earth no no
Current injected in sensor 4 mA 4 mA
Maximum distance between sensor and module 1 km
Logic inputs MES114 MES114E MES114F
Voltage 24 to 250 V DC 110 to 125 V DC 110 V AC 220 to 250 V DC 220 to 240 V AC
Range 19.2 to 275 V DC 88 to 150 V DC 88 to 132 V AC 176 to 275 V DC 176 to 264 V AC
Frequency - - 47 to 63 Hz - 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA
Typical switching threshold 14 V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC
Input limit voltage At state 1 u 19 V CC u 88 V DC u 88 V AC u 176 V DC u 176 V AC
At state 2 y 6 V CC y 75 V DC y 22 V AC y 137 V DC y 48 V AC
Control output relays (O1, O2, O11 contacts)
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A
Breaking resistive load 8/4A 0.7 A 0.3 A
capacity L/R load < 20 ms 6/2A 0.5 A 0.2 A
L/R load < 40 ms 4/1A 0.2 A 0.1 A
resistive load - 8A
load p.f. > 0.3 - 5A
Making capacity < 15 A for 200 ms
Indication relay outputs (O3, O4, O12, O13, O14 contacts)
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz) 100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A
Breaking L/R load < 20ms 2/1A 0.5 A 0.15 A
capacity load p.f. > 0.3 - 1A
Power supply
range deactivated cons. (1) max. cons. (1) inrush current
24 / 250 V DC -20 % +10 % 2 to 4,5 W 6 to 8 W < 10 A for 10 ms
110 / 240 V AC -20 % +10 % 3 to 9 VA 9 to 15 VA < 15 A for first
47.5 to 63 Hz half-period
brownout withstand 10 ms
Analog output
Current 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA
Load impedance < 600 Ω (wiring included)
Accuracy 0.50 %
1) According to configuration.

1/4
PCRED301005EN_1-intro_2004.FM Page 5 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:41 14

Sepam series 20 Environmental characteristics

Electromagnetic comptability IEC / EN standard Level / Class Value

Emission tests
Disturbing field emission
Conducted disturbance emission
EN 55022 / CISPR22
EN 55022 / CISPR22
A
B
1
Immunity tests – Radiated disturbances
Immunity to radiated fields IEC 60255-22-3 / IEC 61000-4-3 III 10 V/m
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2 / IEC 61000-4-2 III 8 kV air
6 kV contact
Immunity tests – Conducted disturbances
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances IEC 61000-4-6 III 10 V
Fast transient bursts IEC 60255-22-4 / IEC 61000-4-4 IV
1 MHz damped oscillating wave IEC 60255-22-1 III 2.5 kV MC
1 kV MD
Impulse waves IEC 61000-4-5 III
Voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11 100% 10 ms
Mechanical robustness IEC / EN standard Level / Class Value
In operation
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 1 Gn
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 10 Gn / 11 ms
Earthquakes IEC 60255-21-3 2
De-energised
Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1 2 (1) 2 Gn
Shocks IEC 60255-21-2 2 (1) 30 Gn / 11 ms
Jolts IEC 60255-21-2 2 (1) 20 Gn / 16 ms
Climatic withstand IEC / EN standard Level / Class Value
In operation
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -25°C
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bb +70°C
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-3 Ca 10 days; 93 % HR; 40°C
Temperature variation with specified variation rate IEC 60068-2-14 Nb –25 °C à +70 °C
5°C/min
Salt mist IEC 60068-2-52 Kb / 2
Influence of corrosion IEC 60068-2-60 21 days ; 75 % HR ; 25 °C ;
0,5 ppm H2S , 1 ppm S02
In storage (4)
Exposure to cold IEC 60068-2-1 Ab -25 °C
Exposure to dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 Bb +70 °C
Continuous exposure to damp heat IEC 60068-2-3 Ca 56 days; 93 % RH; 40 °C
Safety IEC / EN standard Level / Class Value
Enclosure safety tests
Front panel tightness IEC 60529 IP52 Other panels closed, except for
rear panel IP20
NEMA Type 12
with gasket supplied
Fire withstand IEC 60695-2-11 650°C with glow wire
Electrical safety tests
Earth continuity IEC 61131-2 30 A
1.2/50 µs impulse wave IEC 60255-5 5 kV (2)
Power frequency dielectric withstand IEC 60255-5 2 kV 1 mn (3)
Certification
CE generic standard EN 50263 European directives:
b 89/336/EEC Electromagnétic Compatibility (EMC) Directive
v 92/31/EEC Amendment
v 92/68/EEC Amendment
b 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
v 93/68/EEC Amendment
UL - UL508 - CSA C22.2 n° 14-95 File E212533
CSA CSA C22.2 n° 94-M91 / n° 0.17-00 File E210625
(1) Results given for intrinsic withstand, excluding support equipment.
(2) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode.
(3) Except for communication: 1 kVrms.
(4) Sepam must be stored in its original packing.

1/5
 PCRED301005EN_1-intro_2004.FM Page 6 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:41 14

1/6
PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004TDM.fm Page 1 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:42 14

Metering functions Contents

Characteristics 2/2
Phase current
Residual current 2/3
Average current and peak demand currents 2/4
Phase-to-phase voltage
Phase to neutral voltage 2/5
Residual voltage
Positive sequence voltage 2/6 2
Frequency
Temperature 2/7
Tripping current
Negative sequence / unbalance 2/8
Disturbance recording 2/9
Running hours counter and operating time
Thermal capacity used 2/10
Operating time before tripping
Waiting time after tripping 2/11
Starting current and
starting / overload time 2/12
Number of starts before inhibition
Start inhibit time delay 2/13
Cumulative breaking current and number of operations 2/14
Operating time
Charging time 2/15

2/1
 PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 2 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Metering functions Characteristics

General settings Selection Range

Rated phase current In (sensor primary current) 2 or 3 x 1 A / 5 A CTs 1 A to 6250 A
3 LPCT sensors 25 A to 3150 A (1)
Basic current Ib 0.4 to 1.3 In
Residual current In0 sum of 3 phase currents see rated phase current In
CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 2 A rating or 20 A rating
1 A / 5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A to 6250 A (CT primary)
core balance CT + ACE990 (the core bal. CT according to current to be monitored and use of
ratio 1/n should be such that: 50 y n y 1500) ACE990

2 Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage Unp

(Vnp: Rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage: Vnp = Unp/3)
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage Uns 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3
220 V to 250 kV

100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 230 V

2 VTs: U21, U32 100, 110, 115, 120 V
1 VT: U21 100, 110, 115, 120 V
Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz
Metering functions Range Accuracy (2)
Phase current 0.1 to 1.5 In ±1 % typical
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In
±5 % if < 0.3 In
Residual current 0.1 to 1.5 In0 ±1 % typical
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In0
±5 % if < 0.3 In0
Average current and peak demand phase current 0.1 to 1.5 In ±1 % typical
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In
±5 % if < 0.3 In
Phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral voltage 0.05 to 1.2 Unp ±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Unp or Vnp
0.05 to 1.2 Vnp ±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Unp or Vnp
Residual voltage 0.015 to 3 Vnp ±1 % from 0.5 to 3 Vnp
±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vnp
±5 % from 0.015 to 0.05 Vnp
Positive sequence voltage 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp ±5 % at Vnp
Frequency 50 ±5 Hz or 60 ±5 Hz ±0.05 Hz
Temperature -30 °C to +200 °C or -22 °F to 392 °F ±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C
±2 °C
Network diagnosis assistance functions
Phase tripping current 0.1 to 40 In ±5 %
Earth fault tripping current 0.1 to 20 In0 ±5 %
Unbalance / negative sequence current li 10 % to 500 % Ib ±2 %
Machine operation assistance functions
Running hours counter / operating time 0 to 65535 hours ±1 % or ±0.5 h
Thermal capacity used 0 to 800 % (100 % for phase I = Ib) ±1 %
Remaining operating time before overload tripping 0 to 999 mn ±1 mn
Waiting time after overload tripping 0 to 999 mn ±1 mn
Starting current 1.2 Ib to 24 In ±5 %
Starting time 0 to 300 s ±10 ms
Start inhibit time delay 0 to 360 mn ±1 mn
Number of starts before inhibition 0 to 60 1
Switchgear diagnosis assistance functions
Cumulative breaking current 0 to 65535 kA2 ±10 %
Number of operations 0 to 65535 1
Operating time 20 to 100 ms ±1 ms
Charging time 1 to 20 s ±0.5 s
(1) Table of In values in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
(2) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), typical at In or Un.

2/2
PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 3 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Metering functions Phase current

Residual current

Phase current
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents:
b I1: phase 1 current
b I2: phase 2 current
b I3: phase 3 current.
It is based on RMS current measurement and takes into account harmonics up to
number 17.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
2
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.1 to 1.5 In (1)
Unit A or kA
Accuracy typically ±1 % (2)
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In
±5 % if < 0.3 In
Display format (3) 3 significant digits
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) In rated current set in the general settings.
(2) At In, in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(3) Display of values: 0.2 to 40 In.

Residual current
Operation
This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current I0.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Measurement range
Connection to 3 phase CT: 0.1 to 1.5 In0 (1)
Connection to 1 CT with CSH30 interposing ring CT 0.1 to 1.5 In0 (1)
Connection to core balance CT with ACE990 0.1 to 1.5 In0 (1)
Connection to CSH residual 2 A rating 0.2 to 3 A
current sensor
20 A rating 2 to 30 A
Unit A or kA
Accuracy (2) typically ±1 % at In0
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In0
±5 % if < 0.3 In0
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
(1) In0 rated current set in the general settings.
(2) in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), excluding sensor accuracy.

2/3
 PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 4 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Metering functions Average current and peak

demand currents

Operation
This function gives:
b the average RMS current for each phase that has been obtained for each
integration interval
b the greatest average RMS current value for each phase that has been obtained
since the last reset.
The values are refreshed after each "integration interval", an interval that may be set
from 5 to 60 mn.

Readout
2 The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Resetting to zero:
b press the clear key on the display when a peak demand current is displayed
b via the clear command in the SFT2841 software
b via the communication link (remote control order TC6).

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.1 to 1.5 In (1)
Unit A or kA
Accuracy typically ±1 % (2)
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In
±5 % if < 0.3 In
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Integration interval 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes
(1) In rated current set in the general settings.
(2) at In, in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

2/4
PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 5 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Metering functions Phase-to-phase voltage

Phase to neutral voltage

Phase-to-phase voltage
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase-to-phase
voltages (according to voltage sensor connections):
b U21: voltage between phases 2 and 1
b U32: voltage between phases 3 and 2
b U13: voltage between phases 1 and 3.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
2
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Unp (1)
Unit V or kV
Accuracy (2) ±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Unp
±2 % from 0,05 to 0.5 Unp
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 V or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Un nominal rating set in the general settings.
(2) at Un, in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Phase-to-neutral voltage
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase-to-neutral
voltages:
b V1: phase 1 phase-to-neutral voltage
b V2: phase 2 phase-to-neutral voltage
b V3: phase 3 phase-to-neutral voltage.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Unit V or kV
Accuracy (2) ±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Vnp
±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 V or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
(2) at Vnp in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

2/5
 PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 6 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Metering functions Residual voltage

Positive sequence voltage

Residual voltage
Operation
This function gives the value of the residual voltage V0 = (V1 + V2 + V3).
V0 is measured:
b by taking the internal sum of the 3 phase voltages
b by an open star / delta VT.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.

Readout
2 The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.015 Vnp to 3 Vnp (1)
Unit V or kV
Accuracy ±1 % from 0.5 to 3 Vnp
±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vnp
±5 % from 0.015 to 0.05 Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 V or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).

Positive sequence voltage

Operation
This function gives the calculated value of the positive sequence voltage Vd.

Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Unit V or kV
Accuracy ±2 % at Vnp
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 V or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).

2/6
PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 7 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Metering functions Frequency

Temperature

Frequency
Operation
This function gives the frequency value.
Frequency is measured via the following:
b based on U21, if only one phase-to-phase voltage is connected to the Sepam
b based on positive sequence voltage, if the Sepam includes U21 and U32
measurements.
Frequency is not measured if:
b the voltage U21 or positive sequence voltage Vd is less than 40 % of Un
b the frequency is outside the measurement range. 2
Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Rated frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Range 50 Hz 45 Hz to 55 Hz
60 Hz 55 Hz to 65 Hz
Accuracy (1) ±0.05 Hz
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 0.01 Hz or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) At Un in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Temperature
Operation
This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature
detectors (RTDs):
b platinum Pt100 (100 Ω at 0 °C) in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760
standards
b nickel 100 Ω or 120 Ω (at 0 °C).
Each RTD channel gives one measurement:
b tx = RTD x temperature.
The function also indicates RTD faults:
b RTD disconnected (tx > 205 °C)
b RTD shorted (tx < -35 °C).
In the event of a fault, display of the value is inhibited.
The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm.

Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Range -30 °C to +200 °C
or -22 °F to +392 °F
Accuracy (1) ±2 °C
±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C
Resolution 1 °C or 1 °F
Refresh interval 5 seconds (typical)
(1) At Un in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Accuracy derating according to wiring : see chapter "installation of MET148-2

module" page 6/22.

2/7
 PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 8 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Network diagnosis Tripping current

functions Negative sequence / unbalance

I TRIP 1 Tripping current

MT10252

Operation
This function gives the RMS value of currents at the prospective time of the last trip:
b TRIP1: phase 1 current
b TRIP2: phase 2 current
b TRIP3: phase 3 current
b TRIPI0: residual current.
tripping order It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.

2 30 ms
This measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms
interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1.

T0 t Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range phase current 0.1 to 40 In (1)
Residual current 0.1 to 20 In0 (1)
Unit A or kA
Accuracy ±5 % ±1 digit
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
(1) In/In0 rated current set in the general settings.

Negative sequence / unbalance

Operation
This function gives the negative sequence component: T = Ii/Ib
The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents:
b 3 phases
1 2
Ii = --- × ( I1 + a I2 + aI3 )
3
2π
j -------
3
with a = e
b 2 phases
1
Ii = ------- × I1 – a 2 I3
3
2π
j -------
3
with a = e
These 2 formulas are equivalent when there is no earth fault.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 10 to 500
Unit % Ib
Accuracy ±2 %
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1%
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

2/8
PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 9 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Network diagnosis Disturbance recording

functions

Operation
This function is used to record analog signal and logical states.
Record storage is activated according to parameter setting by a triggering event (see
Control and monitoring functions - Disturbance recording triggering).
The stored event begins before the triggering event and continues afterwards.
The record comprises the following information:
b values sampled from the different signals
b date
b characteristics of the recorded channels.
The files are recorded in FIFO (First In First Out) type shift storage: the oldest record
is erased when a new record is triggered. 2
Transfer
Files may be transferred locally or remotely:
b locally: using a PC which is connected to the pocket terminal connector and has
the SFT2841 software tool
b remotely: using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control
system.
Recovery
The signals are recovered from a record by means of the SFT2826 software tool.

Principle
stored record
MT10181

time

triggering event (1)

Characteristics
Record duration x periods before the triggering event (1)
total 86 periods
Record content Set-up file:
date, channel characteristics, measuring transformer ratio
Sample file:
12 values per period/recorded signal
Analog signals recorded (2) 4 current channels (I1, I2, I3, I0) or
4 voltage channels (V1, V2, V3)
Logical signals 10 digital inputs, outputs O1, pick-up
Number of stored records 2
File format COMTRADE 97
(1) According to parameter setting with the SFT2841 (default setting 36 cycles).
(2) According to sensor type and connection.

2/9
 PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 10 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Machine operation Running hours counter and

assistance functions operating time
Thermal capacity used

Running hours counter / operating time

The counter gives the running total of time during which the protected device (motor
or transformer) has been operating (I > 0.1Ib). The initial counter value may be
modified using the SFT2841 software.
The counter is saved every 4 hours.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
2 b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Range 0 to 65535
Unit hours

Thermal capacity used

Operation
The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal protection function.
The thermal capacity used is related to the load. The thermal capacity used
measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity.

Saving of thermal capacity used

When the protection unit trips, the current thermal capacity used increased by 10 % (1)
is saved. The saved value is reset to 0 when the thermal capacity used has
decreased sufficiently for the start inhibit time delay to be zero. The saved value is
used again after a Sepam power outage, making it possible to start over with the
temperature buildup that caused the trip.
(1) The 10 % increase is used to take into account the average temperature buildup of motors
when starting.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 800 %
Unit %
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1%
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

2/10
PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 11 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Machine operation Operating time before tripping

assistance functions Waiting time after tripping

Remaining operating time before overload

tripping
Operation
The time is calculated by the thermal protection function. It depends on the thermal
capacity used.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
key 2
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 999 mn
Unit mn
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 mn
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

Waiting time after overload tripping

Operation
The time is calculated by the thermal protection function. It depends on the thermal
capacity used.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 999 mn
Unit mn
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 mn
Refresh period 1 second (typical)

2/11
 PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 12 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Machine operation Starting current and

assistance functions starting / overload time

Operation
The starting / overload time is the time between the moment at which one of
the 3 phase currents exceeds 1.2 Ib and the moment at which the 3 currents drop
back below 1.2 Ib.
The maximum phase current obtained during this period is the starting / overload
current.
The 2 values are saved in the event of an auxiliary power failure.

Readout

2 The measurements may be accessed via:

b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
key

b the communication link.

Characteristics
Starting / overload time
Measurement range 0 to 300 s
Unit s or ms
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
Starting / overload current
Measurement range 1.2 Ib to 24 In (1)
Unit A or kA
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)
(1) Or 65.5 kA.

2/12
PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 13 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Machine operation Number of starts before inhibition

assistance functions Start inhibit time delay

Number of starts before inhibition

Operation
The number of starts allowed before inhbition is calculated by the number of starts
protection function.
The number of starts depends on the thermal state of the motor.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
key
2
b the communication link.

Resetting to zero
The number of starts counters may be reset to zero as follows, after the entry
of a password:
b on the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the "clear" key
b on the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 60
Unit none
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

Start inhibit time delay

Operation
The time delay is calculated by the number of starts protection function.
If the number of starts protection function indicates that starting is inhibited, the time
given represents the waiting time before starting is allowed.

Readout
The number of starts and waiting time may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.

Characteristics
Measurement range 0 to 360 mn
Unit mn
Display format 3 significant digits
Resolution 1 mn
Refresh interval 1 second (typical)

2/13
 PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 14 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Switchgear diagnosis Cumulative breaking current and

functions number of operations

Cumulative breaking current

Operation
This function indicates the cumulative breaking current in square kiloamperes (kA)2
for five current ranges.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
The current ranges displayed are:
b 0 < I < 2 In
b 2 In < I < 5 In
b 5 In < I < 10 In
2 b 10 In < I < 40 In
b I > 40 In.
The function also provides the total number of operations and the cumulative total of
breaking current in (kA)².
Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information.

Number of operation
The function is activated by tripping commands (O1 relay).
Each value is saved in the event of a power failure.

Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
The initial values may be introduced using the SFT2841 software tool to take into
account the real state of a used breaking device.

Characteristics
Breaking current (kA)2
Range 0 to 65535 (kA)2
Unit primary (kA)2
Accuracy (1) ±10 %
Number of operations
Range 0 to 65535
(1) At In, in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

2/14
PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 15 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Switchgear diagnosis Operating time

functions Charging time

Operating time
Operation
This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device (1) and
change of status of the device open position contact connected to the I11 input (2).
The function is inhibited when the input is set for AC voltage (3).
The value is saved in the event of a power failure.

Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
key 2
b the communication link.
(1) Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information.
(2) Optional MES module.
(3) Optional MES114E or MES114F modules.

Characteristics
Measurement range 20 to 100
Unit ms
Accuracy typically ±1 ms
Display format 3 significant digits

Charging time
Operation
This function gives the value of the breaking device (1) operating mechanism charging
time, determined according to the device closed position status change contact and
the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam I12 and I24 (2).
The value is saved in the event of a power failure.

Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
(1) Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information.
(2) Optional MES114 or MES114E or MES114F modules.

Characteristics
Measurement range 1 to 20
Unit s
Accuracy ±0.5 sec
Display format 3 significant digits

2/15
 PCRED301005EN_2-Metering_2004.FM Page 16 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:43 14

Switchgear diagnosis
functions

2/16
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004TDM.fm Page 1 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:44 14

Protection functions Contents

Setting ranges 3/2

Phase-to-phase undervoltage 3/4
ANSI code 27
Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation
direction check 3/5
ANSI code 27D/47
Remanent undervoltage 3/6
ANSI code 27R
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage 3/7
ANSI code 27S
Phase undercurrent 3/8
ANSI code 37
Temperature monitoring
ANSI code 38/49T
3/ 9 3
Negative sequence / unbalance 3/10
ANSI code 46
Excessive starting time, locked rotor 3/12
ANSI code 48/51LR/14
Thermal overload 3/13
ANSI code 49RMS
Phase overcurrent 3/22
ANSI code 50/51
Earth fault 3/24
ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G
Phase-to-phase overvoltage 3/26
ANSI code 59
Neutral voltage displacement 3/27
ANSI code 59N
Starts per hour 3/28
ANSI code 66
Recloser 3/29
ANSI code 79
Overfrequency 3/31
ANSI code 81H
Underfrequency 3/32
ANSI code 81L
Rate of change of frequency 3/33
ANSI code 81R
General
IDMT protection functions 3/34

3/1
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 2 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Setting ranges

General settings Selection Range

Rated phase current In (sensor primary 2 or 3 x 1 A / 5 A CTs 1 A to 6250 A
current)
3 LPCT sensors 25 A to 3150 A (2)
Basic current Ib 0.4 to 1.3 In
Residual current In0 sum of 3 phase currents see rated phase current In
CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT 2 A rating or 20 A rating
1 A / 5 A CT + CSH30 interposing ring CT 1 A to 6250 A (CT primary)
core balance CT + ACE990 (the core bal. CT according to current to be monitored and use of ACE990
ratio 1/n should be such that: 50 y n y 1500)
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage Unp 220 V to 250 kV
(Vnp: Rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage:
Vnp = Unp/3)
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage Uns 3 VTs: V1, V2, V3 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 230 V
2 VTs: U21, U32 100, 110, 115, 120 V
1 VT: U21 100, 110, 115, 120 V

3
Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz

Functions Settings Time delays

ANSI 27 - Phase-to-phase undervoltage
5 to 100 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27D/47 - Positive sequence undervoltage
30 to 100 % of Vnp (Unp/3) 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage
5 to 100 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27S - Phase-to-neutral undervoltage
5 to 100 % of Vnp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent
0.15 to 1 Ib 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature (RTDs)
0 to 180 °C (or 32 to 356 °F)
ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance
Definite time 0.1 to 5 Ib 0.1 s to 300 s
IDMT 0.1 to 0.5 Ib (Schneider Electric) 0.1 to 1Ib (IEC, IEEE) 0.1 s to 1 s
ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Excessive starting time/locked rotor
0.5 Ib to 5 Ib ST start time 0.5 s to 300 s
LT and LTS time delay 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload Operating rate 1 Operating rate 2
Negative sequence coefficient 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9
Time constant Heat rise T1: 5 to 120 mn T1: 5 to 120 mn
Cooling T2: 5 to 600 mn T2: 5 to 600 mn
Alarm and trip set points 50 to 300 % of normal heat rise
Cold curve modification coefficient 0 to 100 %
Operating rate change condition By Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib (motor)
By logic input I26 (transformer)
Maximum equipment temperature 60 to 200 °C
ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent
Tripping curve Timer hold delay
Definite time DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT
RI DT
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Is set point 0.1 to 24 In Definite time Inst. 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 to 2.4 In IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Timer hold delay Definite time (DT; timer hold) Inst. 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT; reset time) 0.5 s to 20 s

3/2
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 3 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Setting ranges

Functions Settings Time delays

ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault
Tripping curve Time hold delay
Definite time DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1) DT
RI DT
IEC: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F) DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI DT or IDMT
Is0 set point 0.1 to 15 In0 Definite time Inst. 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 to 1 In0 IDMT 0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Timer hold delay Definite time (DT; timer hold) Inst. 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT; reset time) 0.5 s to 300 s
ANSI 59 - Phase-to-phase overvoltage
50 to 150 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement

ANSI 66 - Starts per hour

2 to 80 % of Unp 0.05 s to 300 s
3
1 to 60 per hour hour 1 to 6 h
1 to 60 consecutive time between starts 0 to 90 mn
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
Set point 1 and set point 2 45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz 0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency
0.1 to 10 Hz/s Inst. 0.15 s to 300 s
Reminder: In current, Unp rated voltage and In0 current are general settings that are made at the time of Sepam commissioning.
They are given as the values on the measurement transformer primary windings.
The current, voltage and frequency values are set by direct entry of the values (resolution: 1 A, 1 V, 0.1 Hz, 1 °C or F).
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
(2) Table of In values in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.

3/3
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 4 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Phase-to-phase undervoltage

ANSI code 27

Operation
The protection function is three-phase:
b it picks up if one of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages drops below the Us set point
b it includes a definite time delay T.

Block diagram
U21
MT10873

T 0
U32 U < Us time-delayed output

U13 “pick-up” signal

Characteristics
Us set point

3 Setting
Accuracy (1)
5 % Unp to 100 % Unp
±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 103 % ±2.5 %
Time delay T
Setting 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 35 ms (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time < 35 ms
Reset time < 40 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

3/4
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 5 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Positive sequence undervoltage

and phase rotation direction check
ANSI code 27D/47

Operation
Positive sequence undervoltage
The protection picks up when the positive sequence component Vd of a three-phase
voltage system drops below the Vsd set point with
1
Vd = --- ( V1 + V2 + a 2 V3 )
3
1
Vd = --- ( U21 – a 2 U32 )
3
2π
j -------
U 3
with V = ------- and a = e
3

b it includes a definite time delay T

b it allows drops in motor electrical torque to be detected.
Phase rotation direction
This protection also allows the phase rotation direction to be detected.
The protection considers that the phase rotation direction is inverse when the positive
sequence voltage is less than 10 % of Unp and when the phase-to-phase voltage is
3
greater than 80 % of Unp.

Block diagram
T 0
Vd Vd < Vsd time-delayed output
MT10872

“pick-up” signal
Vd < 0.1Un

(2)
& rotation display
U21 U > 0.8 Un
(or V1)

Characteristics
Vsd set point
Setting 15 % Unp to 60 % Unp
Accuracy (1) ±2 %
Pick-up/drop-out ratio 103 % ±2,5 %
Resolution 1%
Time delay
Setting 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristics times
Operating time pick-up < 55 ms
Overshoot time < 35 ms
Reset time < 35 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Displays "rotation" instead of positive sequence voltage measurement.

3/5
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 6 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Remanent undervoltage

ANSI code 27R

Operation
This protection is single-phase:
b it picks up when the U21 phase-to-phase voltage is less than the Us set point
b the protection includes a definite time delay.

Block diagram
T 0
U21 U < Us time-delayed output
MT10875

(or V1)

“pick-up” signal

Characteristics
Us set point

3 Setting
Accuracy (1)
Resolution
5 % Unp to 100 % Unp
±2 % or 0.005 Unp
1%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 103 % ±2.5 %
Time delay T
Setting 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time < 40 ms
Overshoot time < 20 ms
Reset time < 30 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

3/6
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 7 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Phase-to-neutral undervoltage

ANSI code 27S

Operation
This protection is three-phase:
b it picks up when one of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages drops below the Vs set
point
b it has 3 independent outputs available for the control matrix
b it is operational if the number of VTs connected is V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32 with
measurement of V0.

Block diagram
T 0
V1 V1 < Vs time-delayed output
MT10874

T 0
V2 V2 < Vs time-delayed output

V3 V3 < Vs
T 0
time-delayed output 3
1 “pick-up” signal

Characteristics
Vs set point
Setting 5 % Vnp to 100 % Vnp
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or 0.005 Vnp
Resolution 1%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 103 % ±2.5 %
Time delay T
Setting 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 35 ms (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time < 35 ms
Reset time < 40 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

3/7
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 8 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Phase undercurrent

ANSI code 37

Operation Block diagram

This protection is single-phase: 15 ms 0
b it picks up when phase 1 current drops below the Is I1 I < Is T 0

DE50367
& time-delayed
set point output”
b it is inactive when the current is less than 10 % of Ib
b it is insensitive to current drops (breaking) due to “pick-up”
circuit breaker tripping signal
b it includes a definite time delay T. I>
0.1 Ib

t Characteristics
MT10426

Is set point
Setting 15 % Ib y Is y 100 % Ib by steps of 1 %
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
T
Pick-up/drop-out ratio 106 % ±5 % for Is > 0.1 In
T time delay
3 0 0,1 Ib Is I
Setting
Accuracy (1)
50 ms y T y 300 s
±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Operating principle Characteristic times
1.06 Is Operating time < 50 ms
Is Overshoot time < 35 ms
MT10865

0.1 Ib Reset time < 40 ms

(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
“pick-up”
signal

time-delayed
output
Case of current sag.

1.06 Is
Is
MT10866

0.1 Ib

“pick-up”
signal = 0 <15 ms

time-delayed
output = 0
Case of circuit breaker tripping.

3/8
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 9 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Temperature monitoring

ANSI code 38/49T

Operation
This protection is associated with an RTD of the Pt100 platinum (100 Ω at 0 °C) or
(nickel 100 Ω, nickel 120 Ω) type in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760
standards.
b it picks up when the monitored temperature is greater than the Ts set point
b it has two independent set points:
v alarm set point
v tripping set point
b when the protection is activated, it detects whether the RTD is shorted or
disconnected:
v RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than -35 °C
(measurement displayed “****”)
v RTD disconnection is detected if the measured temperature is greater than
+205 °C (measurement displayed “-****”).
If an RTD fault is detected, the set point output relays are inhibited: the protection
outputs are set to zero.
The "RTD fault" item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm
message is generated. 3
Block diagram

T < +205 ˚C
MT10878

& T > Ts1 set point 1

RTD T > Ts2 set point 2

& RTD’s fault

T > -35 ˚C

Characteristics
Ts1 and Ts2 set points °C °F
Setting 0 °C to 180 °C 32 °F to 356 °F
Accuracy (1) ±1.5 °C ±2.7 °F
Resolution 1 °C 1 °F
Pick-up/drop-out difference 3 °C ±0.5 °
Characteristic times
Operation time < 5 seconds
(1) See "connection of MET148-2 module" chapter for accuracy derating according to wiring
cross-section.

3/9
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 10 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Negative sequence / unbalance

ANSI code 46

Operation The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations:

The negative sequence / unbalance protection b for Is/Ib y Ii/Ib y 0,.
function: 3,19
b picks up if the negative sequence component of t = -------------------
-. T
( li/lb )
1,5
phase currents is greater than the operation set point
b it is time-delayed. The time delay may be definite
time or IDMT (see curve). b for 0.5 y Ii/Ib y 5
The negative sequence current is determined 4,64
according to the 3 phase currents. t = ----------------------. T
( li/lb )
0,96
1 2
Ii = --- × ( I1 + a I2 + aI3 )
3
b for Ii/Ib > 5
2π
j ------- t=T
3
with a = e
If Sepam is connected to 2 phase current sensors only,
the negative sequence current is: Block diagram
3 1
Ii = ------- × I1 – a 2 I3
3 I1
DE50557

T 0
2π I2 Ii > Is time-delayed
j ------- output
3
with a = e I3
“pick-up”
Both formulas are equivalent when there is no zero
signal
sequence current (earth fault).
Definite time protection
Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps, and T
is the protection operation time delay.
t Characteristics
MT10550

Curve
Setting Definite, IDMT
Is set point
Setting Definite time 10 % Ib y Is y 500 % Ib
IDMT 10 % Ib y Is y 50 % Ib
T
Resolution 1%
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Time delay T (operation time at 5 Ib)
Is Ii Setting Definite time 100 ms y T y 300 s
Definite time protection principle. IDMT 100 ms y T y 1 s
Resolution 10 ms ou 1 digit
IDMT protection Accuracy (1) Definite time ±2 % or ±25 ms
For Ii > Is, the time delay depends on the value of Ii/Ib IDMT ±5 % or ±35 ms
(Ib: basis current of the protected equipment defined Pick-up/drop-out ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
when the general parameters are set) Characteristic times
T corresponds to the time delay for Ii/Ib = 5 Operation time pick-up < 55 ms
Overshoot time < 35 ms
Reset time < 55 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
MT10857

IDMT protection principle.

3/10
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 11 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Negative sequence / unbalance

ANSI code 46

Determination of tripping time for IDMT tripping curve

different negative sequence current t(s)

MT10546
values for a given curve
10000
Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to
the required negative sequence current. The tripping 5000
time is equal to KT.
Example 2000
given a tripping curve with the setting T = 0.5 s. 1000
What is the tripping time at 0.6 Ib?
Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to 500
60 % of Ib.
The table reads K = 7.55. The tripping time is equal to: 200
0.5 x 7.55 = 3.755 s.
100

50

20
max. curve (T=1s)
3
10

0.5

0.2

0,1

0.05 min. curve (T=0,1s)

0.02

0.01

0.005

0.002

0.001 I/Ib

0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20

li (% lb) 10 15 20 25 30 33.33 35 40 45 50 55 57.7 60 65 70 75

K 99.95 54.50 35.44 25.38 19.32 16.51 15.34 12.56 10.53 9.00 8.21 7.84 7.55 7.00 6.52 6.11

li (% lb) cont’d 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
K cont’d 5.74 5.42 5.13 4.87 4.64 4.24 3.90 3.61 3.37 3.15 2.96 2.80 2.65 2.52 2.40 2.29

li (% lb) cont’d 22. 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370
K cont’d 2.14 2.10 2.01 1.94 1.86 1.80 1.74 1.68 1.627 1.577 1.53 1.485 1.444 1.404 1.367 1.332

li (% lb) cont’d 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 u 500
K cont’d 1.298 1.267 1.236 1.18 1.167 1.154 1.13 1.105 1.082 1.06 1.04 1.02 1

3/11
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 12 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Excessive starting time,

locked rotor
ANSI code 48/51LR/14

Operation
This function is three-phase.
DE50558

It comprises two parts:

b excessive starting time: during starting, the protection picks up when one of the
3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the
ST time delay (normal starting time)
b locked rotor:
v at the normal operating rate (after starting), the protection picks up when one of
the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than
the LT time delay of the definite time type
v locked on start: large motors may have very long starting time, due to their inertia
or the reduce voltage supply. This starting time is longer than the permissive rotor
blocking time. To protect such a motor LTS timer initiate a trip if a start has been
Case of normal starting. detected (I > Is) or if the motor speed is zero. For a normal start, the input I23
(zero-speed-switch) disable this protection.

3 Motor re-acceleration
DE50559

When the motor re-accelerates, it consumes a current in the vicinity of the starting
current (> Is) without the current first passing through a value less than 10 % of Ib.
The ST time delay, which corresponds to the normal starting time, may be
reinitialized by a logic data input for particular uses (input I22).
b reinitialize the excessive starting time protection
b set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value.

Starting is detected when the current consumed is 10 % greater than the Ib current.

Case of excessive starting time. Block diagram

≥1 tripping
MT10870

output
DE50560

ST 0
I > 0.1Ib LT 0
R & locked
rotor output
I1
I2 input I22
I3 ≥1
& starting
I > Is time output

LTS 0
& locked rotor
input I23 at output

Case of locked rotor output.

Characteristics
DE50561

Is set point
Setting 50 % Ib y Is y 500 % Ib
Resolution 1%
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Pick-up/drop-out ratio 93.5 % ±5 %
ST, LT and LTS time delays
Setting ST 500 ms y T y 300 s
LT 50 ms y T y 300 s
LTS 50 ms y T y 300 s
Resolution 10 ms ou 1 digit
Accuracy (1) ±2 % ou ±25 ms

(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

Case of starting locked rotor.

3/12
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 13 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS

Description For self-ventilated rotating machines, cooling is more effective when the machine is
This function is used to protect equipment (motors, running than when it is stopped. Running and stopping of the equipment are
transformers, generators, lines, capacitors) against calculated from the value of the current:
overloads, based on measurement of the current b running if I > 0.1 Ib
consumed. b stopped if I < 0.1 Ib.
Two time constants may be set:
Operation curve
b T1: heat rise time constant: concerns equipment that is running
The protection gives a trip order when the heat rise E,
b T2: cooling time constant: concerns equipment that is stopped.
calculated according to the measurement of an
equivalent current Ieq, is greater than the set point Es.
Accounting for harmonics
The greatest permissible continuous current is
The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3-phase current which
I = Ib Es
takes into account harmonics up to number 17.
The protection tripping time is set by the time
constant T.
b the calculated heat rise depends on the current Accounting for ambient temperature
consumed and the previous heat rise state. Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of
b the cold curve defines the protection tripping time 40 °C. The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature
(Sepam equipped with the temperature sensor option (1)) to increase the calculated
based on zero heat rise.
b the hot curve defines the protection tripping time
based on 100 % nominal heat rise.
heat rise value when the temperature measured exceeds 40 °C. 3
Tmax – 40°C
Increase factor: fa = -----------------------------------------------------
101 Cold curve Tmax – Tambient
2
 leq
---------
MT10858

in which T max is the equipment’s maximum temperature

10 0
t  lb 
--- = Ln ------------------------------- (according to insulation class)
T 2
 leq
--------- – Es T ambient is the measured temperature.
10-1  lb 
(1) MET148-2 module, RTC 8 predefined for ambient temperature measurement.
10-2 Hot curve 2
 leq
--------- – 1 Adaptation of the protection to motor thermal withstand
t  lb 
10-3 --- = Ln ------------------------------- Motor thermal protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by
0 5 10 T 2
 leq
--------- Es
the machine manufacturer. To fully comply with these experimental curves, additional
 lb  – parameters must be set:
b initial heat rise, Es0, is used to reduce the cold tripping time.
2
Alarm set point, tripping set point  leq
--------- – Es0
Two set points may be set for heat rise: t  lb 
modified cold curve: --- = Ln ----------------------------------
-
b Es1: alarm T  leq
2
--------- – Es
b Es2: tripping.  lb 
b a second group of parameters (time constants and set points) is used to take into
“Hot state” set point account thermal withstand with locked rotors. This second set of parameters is taken
When the function is used to protect a motor, this fixed into account when the current is greater than an adjustable set point Is.
set point is designed for detection of the hot state used Accounting for negative sequence current
by the number of starts function. In the case of motors with coiled rotors, the presence of a negative sequence
component increases the heat rise in the motor. The negative sequence component
Heat rise and cooling time constants of the current is taken into account in the protection by the equation
E E
2 2
1 leq = lph + K ⋅ li in which Iph is the greatest phase current
MT10419

MT10420

1
Ii is the negative sequence component of
0,63 the current
0,36 K is an adjustable factor
0 0
T1 t T2 t K may have the following values: 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9
For an asynchronous motor, K is determined as follows:
Heat rise time constant. Cooling time constant.
Cd 1
K = 2 ⋅ -------- ⋅ ---------------------
- – 1 in which Cn, Cd: rated torque and starting torque
Cn ld 2
g ⋅ -----
 Ib, Id: basis current and starting current
 lb g: rated slip.

Saving of heat rise

When the protection trips, the current heat rise, increased by 10 %, is saved
(Increasing by 10 % makes it possible to take into account the average heat rise of
motors when starting). The saved value is reset to zero when the heat rise decreases
sufficiently for the time before starting to be zero. The saved value is used when the
power returns after a Sepam power failure, so as to start up again with the heat rise
that triggered tripping.

3/13
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 14 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS

Start inhibit User information

The thermal overload protection can inhibit the closing The following information is available for the user:
of the motor’s control device until the heat rise drops b time before restart enabled (in case of inhibition of starting)
back down below a value that allows restarting. b time before tripping (with constant current)
This value takes into account the heat rise produced by b heat rise.
the motor when starting. See chapter "Machine operation assistance functions".
The inhibition function is grouped together with the
starts per hour protection and the indication START Characteristics
INHIBIT informs the user. Set points group A group B
Inhibition of the thermal overload protection Setting Es1 alarm set point 50 % to 300 % 50 % to 300 %
function Es2 tripping set point 50 % to 300 % 50 % to 300 %
Tripping of the thermal overload protection function (in Es0 initial heat rise 0 to 100 % 0 to 100 %
the case of a motor) may be locked out, when required Resolution 1% 1%
by the process, by: Time constants
b logic input I26 Setting T1 running (heat rise) 1 mn to 120 mn 1 mn to 120 mn
b remote control order TC7 (inhibit thermal overload T2 stopped (cooling) 5 mn to 600 mn 5 mn to 600 mn

3 protection).
Remote control order TC13 may be used to enable the
operation of the thermal overload protection function.
Resolution
Accounting for negative sequence component
Setting K 0 – 2.25 – 4.5 – 9
1 mn 1 mn

Taking into account 2 transformer operating rates Maximum equipment temperature (according to insulation class) (2)
Power transformers often have two ventilation operating Setting T max 60° to 200°
rates: Resolution 1°
b ONAN (Oil Natural, Air Natural) Tripping time
b ONAF (Oil Natural, Air Forced). Accuracy (1) 2%
The two groups of thermal overload protection Change of setting parameters
parameters enable both of these operating rates to be By current threshold for motor
taken into account. Is set point 0.25 to 8 Ib
Switching from one group of thermal settings to the By digital input for transformer
other is controlled by logic input I26. Input I26
Switching is carried out without any loss of the thermal (1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-8).
capacity used value. (2) Equipment manufacturer data.
Taking into account 2 motor operating rates
Switching from one set of thermal settings to the other
is controlled by.
b logic input I26
b overrun of a set point by the equivalent current.
The 2 groups of thermal overload protection parameters
enable both operating rates to be taken into account.
Switching is carried out without any loss of the thermal
capacity used value.

Block diagram
DE50243

3/14
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 15 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

Example 1 For an overload of 2 Ib, the value t/T1 = 0.0339 (2) is obtained.
The following data are available: In order for Sepam to trip at the point 1 (t = 70 s), T1 is equal to 2065 sec ≈ 34 min.
b time constants for on operation T1 and off operation With a setting of T1 = 34 min, the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state
T2: (point 2). In this case, it is equal to t/T1 = 0.3216 ⇒ t ⇒ 665 sec, i.e. ≈ 11 min,
v T1 = 25 min which is compatible with the thermal resistance of the motor when cold.
v T2 = 70 min The negative sequence factor is calculated using the equation defined on page 3/13.
b maximum curve in steady state: Imax/Ib = 1.05. The parameters of the second thermal overload relay do not need to be set.
They are not taken into account by default.
Setting of tripping set point Es2
Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 110 % Example 3
Please note: if the motor absorbs a current of 1.05 Ib in The following data are available:
steady state, the heat rise calculated by the thermal b motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves (see solid line curves
overload protection will reach 110 %. in Figure 1),
Setting of alarm set point Es1 b cooling time constant T2
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95). b maximum steady state current: Imax/Ib = 1.1.
Knegative: 4.5 (usual value) Setting of tripping set point Es2
The other thermal overload parameters do not need to Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 120 %
be set. They are not taken into account by default.

Example 2
Setting of alarm set point Es1
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95).
3
The following data are available: The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after
b motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold 100 s (point 1).
curves (see solid line curves in Figure 1) With t/T1 = 0.069 (I/Ib = 2 and Es2 = 120 %):
b cooling time constant T2 ⇒ T1 = 100 s / 0.069 = 1449 sec ≈ 24 min.
b maximum steady state current: Imax/Ib = 1.05. The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to:
t/T1 = 0.3567 ⇒ t = 24 min 0.3567 = 513 s (point 2’).
Setting of tripping set point Es2
This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 s (point 2).
Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 110 %
If the time constant T1 is lowered, the thermal overload protection will trip earlier,
Setting of alarm set point Es1: below point 2.
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95). There risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case
The manufacturer’s hot/cold curves (1) may be used to (see Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve
determine the heating time constant T1. with U = 0.9 Un).
The approach consists of placing the Sepam hot/cold The Es0 parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering
curves below the motor curves. the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve.
In this example, the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 s starting from
Figure 1: motor thermal resistance and thermal the cold state.
overload tripping curves The following equation is used to obtain the Es0 value:
t ne ces sary
2 ---------------------- 2
l processed T
DE50368

motor cold curve Es0 = -------------------- – e 1 . l-------------------

processed
- – Es2
lb l
Sepam cold curve b
time before tripping / s

665 with:
2 motor hot curve
t necessary : tripping time necessary starting from a cold state.
I processed : equipment current.
Sepam hot curve
70 1 (1) When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot/cold
curves, the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate.
(2) The charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve may be used, or else
the equation of the curve which is given on page 3/13.

1.05 2 I/Ib

3/15
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 16 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

In numerical values, the following is obtained: Use of the additional setting group
400 sec When a motor rotor is locked or is turning very slowly, its thermal behavior is different
---------------------------
Es0 = 4 – e 24∗ 60sec = 0.3035 ≈ 31% from that with the rated load. In such conditions, the motor is damaged by
overheating of the rotor or stator. For high power motors, rotor overheating is most
By setting Es0 = 31 %, point 2’ is moved downward to often a limiting factor.
obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with the The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no
motor’s thermal resistance when cold (see Figure 3). longer valid.
Please note: A setting Es0 = 100 % therefore means In order to protect the motor in this case, “excessive starting time” protection may be
that the hot and cold curves are the same. used.
Nevertheless, motor manufacturers provide the thermal resistance curves when the
Figure 2: hot/cold curves not compatible with the rotor is locked, for different voltages at the time of starting.
motor’s thermal resistance
Figure 4: Locked rotor thermal resistance
Sepam cold curve motor running locked rotor
DE50369

MT10863

3
motor cold curve
time before tripping / s

513 2’
400 2
motor hot curve
times / s

1
100 1 Sepam hot curve

3
2
starting at Un
starting at 0.9 Un
1.05 2 I/Ib 4 5 6
1.1 2 Is I/Ib

Figure 3: hot/cold curves compatible with the ➀: thermal resistance, motor running
motor’s thermal resistance via the setting of an ➁: thermal resistance, motor stopped
initial heat rise Es0 ➂: Sepam tripping curve
➃: starting at 65 % Un
➄: starting at 80 % Un
➅: starting at 100 % Un
DE50370

adjusted Sepam
cold curve In order to take these curves into account, the second thermal overload relay may be
used.
time before tripping / s

motor cold curve

The time constant in this case is, in theory, the shortest one: however, it should not
400 be determined in the same way as that of the first relay.
2
motor hot curve
The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the
equivalent current Ieq exceeds the Is value (set point current).
100
1 Sepam hot curve

starting at Un
starting at 0.9 Un
1.1 2 I/Ib

3/16
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 17 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

Cold curves for Es0 = 0

l/Ib 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Es (%)
50 0.6931 0.6042 0.5331 0.4749 0.4265 0.3857 0.3508 0.3207 0.2945 0.2716 0.2513 0.2333 0.2173 0.2029 0.1900 0.1782 0.1676
55 0.7985 0.6909 0.6061 0.5376 0.4812 0.4339 0.3937 0.3592 0.3294 0.3033 0.2803 0.2600 0.2419 0.2257 0.2111 0.1980 0.1860
60 0.9163 0.7857 0.6849 0.6046 0.5390 0.4845 0.4386 0.3993 0.3655 0.3360 0.3102 0.2873 0.2671 0.2490 0.2327 0.2181 0.2048
65 1.0498 0.8905 0.7704 0.6763 0.6004 0.5379 0.4855 0.4411 0.4029 0.3698 0.3409 0.3155 0.2929 0.2728 0.2548 0.2386 0.2239
70 1.2040 1.0076 0.8640 0.7535 0.6657 0.5942 0.5348 0.4847 0.4418 0.4049 0.3727 0.3444 0.3194 0.2972 0.2774 0.2595 0.2434
75 1.3863 1.1403 0.9671 0.8373 0.7357 0.6539 0.5866 0.5302 0.4823 0.4412 0.4055 0.3742 0.3467 0.3222 0.3005 0.2809 0.2633
80 1.6094 1.2933 1.0822 0.9287 0.8109 0.7174 0.6413 0.5780 0.5245 0.4788 0.4394 0.4049 0.3747 0.3479 0.3241 0.3028 0.2836
85 1.8971 1.4739 1.2123 1.0292 0.8923 0.7853 0.6991 0.6281 0.5686 0.5180 0.4745 0.4366 0.4035 0.3743 0.3483 0.3251 0.3043
90 2.3026 1.6946 1.3618 1.1411 0.9808 0.8580 0.7605 0.6809 0.6147 0.5587 0.5108 0.4694 0.4332 0.4013 0.3731 0.3480 0.3254
95 1.9782 1.5377 1.2670 1.0780 0,9365 0.8258 0.7366 0.6630 0.6012 0.5486 0.5032 0.4638 0.4292 0.3986 0.3714 0.3470
100 2.3755 1.7513 1.4112 1.1856 1.0217 0.8958 0.7956 0.7138 0.6455 0.5878 0.5383 0.4953 0.4578 0.4247 0.3953 0.3691
105 3.0445 2.0232 1.5796 1.3063 1.1147 0.9710 0.8583 0.7673 0.6920 0.6286 0.5746 0.5279 0,4872 0,4515 0,4199 0,3917
110 2.3979 1.7824 1.4435 1.2174 1.0524 0.9252 0.8238 0.7406 0.6712 0.6122 0.5616 0.5176 0.4790 0.4450 0.4148
115
120
3.0040 2.0369
2.3792
1.6025
1.7918
1.3318
1.4610
1.1409
1.2381
0,9970
1.0742
0.8837
0.9474
0.7918
0.8457
0.7156
0.7621
0.6514
0.6921
0.5964
0.6325
0.5489
0.5812
0.5074
0.5365
0.4708
0.4973
0.4384
0.4626
3
125 2.9037 2.0254 1.6094 1.3457 1.1580 1.0154 0.9027 0.8109 0.7346 0.6700 0.6146 0.5666 0.5245 0.4874
130 2.3308 1.7838 1.4663 1.2493 1.0885 0.9632 0.8622 0.7789 0.7089 0.6491 0.5975 0.5525 0.5129
135 2.7726 1.9951 1.6035 1.3499 1.1672 1.0275 0.9163 0.8253 0.7494 0.6849 0.6295 0.5813 0.5390
140 2.2634 1.7626 1.4618 1.2528 1.0962 0.9734 0.8740 0.7916 0.7220 0.6625 0.6109 0.5658
145 2.6311 1.9518 1.5877 1.3463 1.1701 1.0341 0.9252 0.8356 0.7606 0.6966 0.6414 0.5934
150 3.2189 2.1855 1.7319 1.4495 1.2498 1.0986 0.9791 0.8817 0.8007 0.7320 0.6729 0.6217
155 2.4908 1.9003 1.5645 1.3364 1.1676 1.0361 0.9301 0.8424 0.7686 0.7055 0.6508
160 2.9327 2.1030 1.6946 1.4313 1.2417 1.0965 0.9808 0.8860 0.8066 0.7391 0.6809
165 2.3576 1.8441 1.5361 1.3218 1.1609 1.0343 0.9316 0.8461 0.7739 0.7118
170 2.6999 2.0200 1.6532 1.4088 1.2296 1.0908 0.9793 0.8873 0.8099 0.7438
175 3.2244 2.2336 1.7858 1.5041 1.3035 1.1507 1.0294 0.9302 0.8473 0.7768
180 2.5055 1.9388 1.6094 1.3832 1.2144 1.0822 0.9751 0.8861 0.8109
185 2.8802 2.1195 1.7272 1.4698 1.2825 1.1379 1.0220 0.9265 0.8463
190 3.4864 2.3401 1.8608 1.5647 1.3555 1.1970 1.0713 0.9687 0.8829
195 2.6237 2.0149 1.6695 1.4343 1.2597 1.1231 1.0126 0.9209
200 3.0210 2.1972 1.7866 1.5198 1.3266 1.1778 1.0586 0.9605

3/17
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 18 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

Cold curves for Es0 = 0

I/Ib 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60
Es (%)
50 0.1579 0.1491 0.1410 0.1335 0.1090 0.0908 0.0768 0.0659 0.0572 0.0501 0.0442 0.0393 0.0352 0.0317 0.0288 0.0262 0.0239
55 0.1752 0.1653 0.1562 0.1479 0.1206 0.1004 0.0849 0.0727 0.0631 0.0552 0.0487 0.0434 0.0388 0.0350 0.0317 0.0288 0.0263
60 0.1927 0.1818 0.1717 0.1625 0.1324 0.1100 0.0929 0.0796 0.069 0.0604 0.0533 0.0474 0.0424 0.0382 0.0346 0.0315 0.0288
65 0.2106 0.1985 0.1875 0.1773 0.1442 0.1197 0.1011 0.0865 0.075 0.0656 0.0579 0.0515 0.0461 0.0415 0.0375 0.0342 0.0312
70 0.2288 0.2156 0.2035 0.1924 0.1562 0.1296 0.1093 0.0935 0.081 0.0708 0.0625 0.0555 0.0497 0.0447 0.0405 0.0368 0.0336
75 0.2474 0.2329 0.2197 0.2076 0.1684 0.1395 0.1176 0.1006 0.087 0.0761 0.0671 0.0596 0.0533 0.0480 0.0434 0.0395 0.0361
80 0.2662 0.2505 0.2362 0.2231 0.1807 0.1495 0.1260 0.1076 0.0931 0.0813 0.0717 0.0637 0.0570 0.0513 0.0464 0.0422 0.0385
85 0.2855 0.2685 0.2530 0.2389 0.1931 0.1597 0.1344 0.1148 0.0992 0.0867 0.0764 0.0678 0.0607 0.0546 0.0494 0.0449 0.0410
90 0.3051 0.2868 0.2701 0.2549 0.2057 0.1699 0.1429 0.1219 0.1054 0.092 0.0811 0.0720 0.0644 0.0579 0.0524 0.0476 0.0435
95 0.3251 0.3054 0.2875 0.2712 0.2185 0.1802 0.1514 0.1292 0.1116 0.0974 0.0858 0.0761 0.0681 0.0612 0.0554 0.0503 0.0459
100 0.3456 0.3244 0.3051 0.2877 0.2314 0.1907 0.1601 0.1365 0.1178 0.1028 0.0905 0.0803 0.0718 0.0645 0.0584 0.0530 0.0484
105 0.3664 0.3437 0.3231 0.3045 0.2445 0.2012 0.1688 0.1438 0.1241 0.1082 0.0952 0.0845 0.0755 0.0679 0.0614 0.0558 0.0509
110 0.3877 0.3634 0.3415 0.3216 0.2578 0.2119 0.1776 0.1512 0.1304 0.1136 0.1000 0.0887 0.0792 0.0712 0.0644 0.0585 0.0534

3 115
120
0.4095
0.4317
0.3835
0.4041
0.3602
0.3792
0.3390
0.3567
0.2713
0.2849
0.2227
0.2336
0.1865
0.1954
0.1586
0.1661
0.1367
0.1431
0.1191
0.1246
0.1048
0.1096
0.0929
0.0972
0.0830
0.0868
0.0746
0.0780
0.0674
0.0705
0.0612
0.0640
0.0559
0.0584
125 0.4545 0.4250 0.3986 0.3747 0.2988 0.2446 0.2045 0.1737 0.1495 0.1302 0.1144 0.1014 0.0905 0.0813 0.0735 0.0667 0.0609
130 0.4778 0.4465 0.4184 0.3930 0.3128 0.2558 0.2136 0.1813 0.156 0.1358 0.1193 0.1057 0.0943 0.0847 0.0766 0.0695 0.0634
135 0.5016 0.4683 0.4386 0.4117 0.3270 0.2671 0.2228 0.1890 0.1625 0.1414 0.1242 0.1100 0.0982 0.0881 0.0796 0.0723 0.0659
140 0.5260 0.4907 0.4591 0.4308 0.3414 0.2785 0.2321 0.1967 0.1691 0.147 0.1291 0.1143 0.1020 0.0916 0.0827 0.0751 0.0685
145 0.5511 0.5136 0.4802 0.4502 0.3561 0.2900 0.2414 0.2045 0.1757 0.1527 0.1340 0.1187 0.1058 0.0950 0.0858 0.0778 0.0710
150 0.5767 0.5370 0.5017 0.4700 0.3709 0.3017 0.2509 0.2124 0.1823 0.1584 0.1390 0.1230 0.1097 0.0984 0.0889 0.0806 0.0735
155 0.6031 0.5610 0.5236 0.4902 0.3860 0.3135 0.2604 0.2203 0.189 0.1641 0.1440 0.1274 0.1136 0.1019 0.0920 0.0834 0.0761
160 0.6302 0.5856 0.5461 0.5108 0.4013 0.3254 0.2701 0.2283 0.1957 0.1699 0.1490 0.1318 0.1174 0.1054 0.0951 0.0863 0.0786
165 0.6580 0.6108 0.5690 0.5319 0.4169 0.3375 0.2798 0.2363 0.2025 0.1757 0.1540 0.1362 0.1213 0.1088 0.0982 0.0891 0.0812
170 0.6866 0.6366 0.5925 0.5534 0.4327 0.3498 0.2897 0.2444 0.2094 0.1815 0.1591 0.1406 0.1253 0.1123 0.1013 0.0919 0.0838
175 0.7161 0.6631 0.6166 0.5754 0.4487 0.3621 0.2996 0.2526 0.2162 0.1874 0.1641 0.1451 0.1292 0.1158 0.1045 0.0947 0.0863
180 0.7464 0.6904 0.6413 0.5978 0.4651 0.3747 0.3096 0.2608 0.2231 0.1933 0.1693 0.1495 0.1331 0.1193 0.1076 0.0976 0.0889
185 0.7777 0.7184 0.6665 0.6208 0.4816 0.3874 0.3197 0.2691 0.2301 0.1993 0.1744 0.1540 0.1371 0.1229 0.1108 0.1004 0.0915
190 0.8100 0.7472 0.6925 0.6444 0.4985 0.4003 0.3300 0.2775 0.2371 0.2052 0.1796 0.1585 0.1411 0.1264 0.1140 0.1033 0.0941
195 0.8434 0.7769 0.7191 0.6685 0.5157 0.4133 0.3403 0.2860 0.2442 0.2113 0.1847 0.1631 0.1451 0.1300 0.1171 0.1062 0.0967
200 0.8780 0.8075 0.7465 0.6931 0.5331 0.4265 0.3508 0.2945 0.2513 0.2173 0.1900 0.1676 0.1491 0.1335 0.1203 0.1090 0.0993

3/18
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 19 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

Cold curves for Es0 = 0

I/Ib 4.80 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Es (%)
50 0.0219 0.0202 0.0167 0.0140 0.0119 0.0103 0.0089 0.0078 0.0069 0.0062 0.0056 0.0050 0.0032 0.0022 0.0016 0.0013
55 0.0242 0.0222 0.0183 0.0154 0.0131 0.0113 0.0098 0.0086 0.0076 0.0068 0.0061 0.0055 0.0035 0.0024 0.0018 0.0014
60 0.0264 0.0243 0.0200 0.0168 0.0143 0.0123 0.0107 0.0094 0.0083 0.0074 0.0067 0.0060 0.0038 0.0027 0.0020 0.0015
65 0.0286 0.0263 0.0217 0.0182 0.0155 0.0134 0.0116 0.0102 0.0090 0.0081 0.0072 0.0065 0.0042 0.0029 0.0021 0.0016
70 0.0309 0.0284 0.0234 0.0196 0.0167 0.0144 0.0125 0.0110 0.0097 0.0087 0.0078 0.0070 0.0045 0.0031 0.0023 0.0018
75 0.0331 0.0305 0.0251 0.0211 0.0179 0.0154 0.0134 0.0118 0.0104 0.0093 0.0083 0.0075 0.0048 0.0033 0.0025 0.0019
80 0.0353 0.0325 0.0268 0.0225 0.0191 0.0165 0.0143 0.0126 0.0111 0.0099 0.0089 0.0080 0.0051 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
85 0.0376 0.0346 0.0285 0.0239 0.0203 0.0175 0.0152 0.0134 0.0118 0.0105 0.0095 0.0085 0.0055 0.0038 0.0028 0.0021
90 0.0398 0.0367 0.0302 0.0253 0.0215 0.0185 0.0161 0.0142 0.0125 0.0112 0.0100 0.0090 0.0058 0.0040 0.0029 0.0023
95 0.0421 0.0387 0.0319 0.0267 0.0227 0.0196 0.0170 0.0150 0.0132 0.0118 0.0106 0.0095 0.0061 0.0042 0.0031 0.0024
100 0.0444 0.0408 0.0336 0.0282 0.0240 0.0206 0.0179 0.0157 0.0139 0.0124 0.0111 0.0101 0.0064 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025
105 0.0466 0.0429 0.0353 0.0296 0.0252 0.0217 0.0188 0.0165 0.0146 0.0130 0.0117 0.0106 0.0067 0.0047 0.0034 0.0026
110 0.0489 0.0450 0.0370 0.0310 0.0264 0.0227 0.0197 0.0173 0.0153 0.0137 0.0123 0.0111 0.0071 0.0049 0.0036 0.0028
115
120
0.0512
0.0535
0.0471
0.0492
0.0388
0.0405
0.0325
0.0339
0.0276
0.0288
0.0237
0.0248
0.0207
0.0216
0.0181
0.0189
0.0160
0.0167
0.0143
0.0149
0.0128
0.0134
0.0116
0.0121
0.0074
0.0077
0.0051
0.0053
0.0038
0.0039
0.0029
0.0030
3
125 0.0558 0.0513 0.0422 0.0353 0.0300 0.0258 0.0225 0.0197 0.0175 0.0156 0.0139 0.0126 0.0080 0.0056 0.0041 0.0031
130 0.0581 0.0534 0.0439 0.0368 0.0313 0.0269 0.0234 0.0205 0.0182 0.0162 0.0145 0.0131 0.0084 0.0058 0.0043 0.0033
135 0.0604 0.0555 0.0457 0.0382 0.0325 0.0279 0.0243 0.0213 0.0189 0.0168 0.0151 0.0136 0.0087 0.0060 0.0044 0.0034
140 0.0627 0.0576 0.0474 0.0397 0.0337 0.0290 0.0252 0.0221 0.0196 0.0174 0.0156 0.0141 0.0090 0.0062 0.0046 0.0035
145 0.0650 0.0598 0.0491 0.0411 0.0349 0.0300 0.0261 0.0229 0.0203 0.0181 0.0162 0.0146 0.0093 0.0065 0.0047 0.0036
150 0.0673 0.0619 0.0509 0.0426 0.0361 0.0311 0.0270 0.0237 0.0210 0.0187 0.0168 0.0151 0.0096 0.0067 0.0049 0.0038
155 0.0696 0.0640 0.0526 0.0440 0.0374 0.0321 0.0279 0.0245 0.0217 0.0193 0.0173 0.0156 0.0100 0.0069 0.0051 0.0039
160 0.0720 0.0661 0.0543 0.0455 0.0386 0.0332 0.0289 0.0253 0.0224 0.0200 0.0179 0.0161 0.0103 0.0071 0.0052 0.0040
165 0.0743 0.0683 0.0561 0.0469 0.0398 0.0343 0.0298 0.0261 0.0231 0.0206 0.0185 0.0166 0.0106 0.0074 0.0054 0.0041
170 0.0766 0.0704 0.0578 0.0484 0.0411 0.0353 0.0307 0.0269 0.0238 0.0212 0.0190 0.0171 0.0109 0.0076 0.0056 0.0043
175 0.0790 0.0726 0.0596 0.0498 0.0423 0.0364 0.0316 0.0277 0.0245 0.0218 0.0196 0.0177 0.0113 0.0078 0.0057 0.0044
180 0.0813 0.0747 0.0613 0.0513 0.0435 0.0374 0.0325 0.0285 0.0252 0.0225 0.0201 0.0182 0.0116 0.0080 0.0059 0.0045
185 0.0837 0.0769 0.0631 0.0528 0.0448 0.0385 0.0334 0.0293 0.0259 0.0231 0.0207 0.0187 0.0119 0.0083 0.0061 0.0046
190 0.0861 0.0790 0.0649 0.0542 0.0460 0.0395 0.0344 0.0301 0.0266 0.0237 0.0213 0.0192 0.0122 0.0085 0.0062 0.0048
195 0.0884 0.0812 0.0666 0.0557 0.0473 0.0406 0.0353 0.0309 0.0274 0.0244 0.0218 0.0197 0.0126 0.0087 0.0064 0.0049
200 0.0908 0.0834 0.0684 0.0572 0.0485 0.0417 0.0362 0.0317 0.0281 0.0250 0.0224 0.0202 0.0129 0.0089 0.0066 0.0050

3/19
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 20 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

Hot curves for Es0 = 0

I/Ib 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Es (%)
105 0.6690 0.2719 0.1685 0.1206 0.0931 0.0752 0.0627 0.0535 0.0464 0.0408 0.0363 0.0326 0.0295 0.0268 0.0245 0.0226
110 3.7136 0.6466 0.3712 0.2578 0.1957 0.1566 0.1296 0.1100 0.0951 0.0834 0.0740 0.0662 0.0598 0.0544 0.0497 0.0457
115 1.2528 0.6257 0.4169 0.3102 0.2451 0.2013 0.1699 0.1462 0.1278 0.1131 0.1011 0.0911 0.0827 0.0755 0.0693
120 3.0445 0.9680 0.6061 0.4394 0.3423 0.2786 0.2336 0.2002 0.1744 0.1539 0.1372 0.1234 0.1118 0.1020 0.0935
125 1.4925 0.8398 0.5878 0.4499 0.3623 0.3017 0.2572 0.2231 0.1963 0.1747 0.1568 0.1419 0.1292 0.1183
130 2.6626 1.1451 0.7621 0.5705 0.4537 0.3747 0.3176 0.2744 0.2407 0.2136 0.1914 0.1728 0.1572 0.1438
135 1.5870 0.9734 0.7077 0.5543 0.4535 0.3819 0.3285 0.2871 0.2541 0.2271 0.2048 0.1860 0.1699
140 2.3979 1.2417 0.8668 0.6662 0.5390 0.4507 0.3857 0.3358 0.2963 0.2643 0.2378 0.2156 0.1967
145 1.6094 1.0561 0.7921 0.6325 0.5245 0.4463 0.3869 0.3403 0.3028 0.2719 0.2461 0.2243
150 2.1972 1.2897 0.9362 0.7357 0.6042 0.5108 0.4408 0.3864 0.3429 0.3073 0.2776 0.2526
155 3.8067 1.5950 1.1047 0.8508 0.6909 0.5798 0.4978 0.4347 0.3846 0.3439 0.3102 0.2817
160 2.0369 1.3074 0.9808 0.7857 0.6539 0.5583 0.4855 0.4282 0.3819 0.3438 0.3118
165 2.8478 1.5620 1.1304 0.8905 0.7340 0.6226 0.5390 0.4738 0.4215 0.3786 0.3427

3 170
175
1.9042
2.4288
1.3063
1.5198
1.0076
1.1403
0.8210
0.9163
0.6914
0.7652
0.5955
0.6554
0.5215
0.5717
0.4626
0.5055
0.4146
0.4520
0.3747
0.4077
180 3.5988 1.7918 1.2933 1.0217 0.8449 0.7191 0.6244 0.5504 0.4908 0.4418
185 2.1665 1.4739 1.1394 0.9316 0.7872 0.6802 0.5974 0.5312 0.4772
190 2.7726 1.6946 1.2730 1.0264 0.8602 0.7392 0.6466 0.5733 0.5138
195 4.5643 1.9782 1.4271 1.1312 0.9390 0.8019 0.6985 0.6173 0.5518
200 2.3755 1.6094 1.2483 1.0245 0.8688 0.7531 0.6633 0.5914

I/Ib 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3,20 3,40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60
Es (%)
105 0.0209 0.0193 0.0180 0.0168 0.0131 0.0106 0.0087 0.0073 0.0063 0.0054 0.0047 0.0042 0.0037 0.0033 0.0030 0.0027 0.0025
110 0.0422 0.0391 0.0363 0.0339 0.0264 0.0212 0.0175 0.0147 0.0126 0.0109 0.0095 0.0084 0.0075 0.0067 0.0060 0.0055 0.0050
115 0.0639 0.0592 0.0550 0.0513 0.0398 0.0320 0.0264 0.0222 0.0189 0.0164 0.0143 0.0126 0.0112 0.0101 0.0091 0.0082 0.0075
120 0.0862 0.0797 0.0740 0.0690 0.0535 0.0429 0.0353 0.0297 0.0253 0.0219 0.0191 0.0169 0.0150 0.0134 0.0121 0.0110 0.0100
125 0.1089 0.1007 0.0934 0.0870 0.0673 0.0540 0.0444 0.0372 0.0317 0.0274 0.0240 0.0211 0.0188 0.0168 0.0151 0.0137 0.0125
130 0.1322 0.1221 0.1132 0.1054 0.0813 0.0651 0.0535 0.0449 0.0382 0.0330 0.0288 0.0254 0.0226 0.0202 0.0182 0.0165 0.0150
135 0.1560 0.1440 0.1334 0.1241 0.0956 0.0764 0.0627 0.0525 0.0447 0.0386 0.0337 0.0297 0.0264 0.0236 0.0213 0.0192 0.0175
140 0.1805 0.1664 0.1540 0.1431 0.1100 0.0878 0.0720 0.0603 0.0513 0.0443 0.0386 0.0340 0.0302 0.0270 0.0243 0.0220 0.0200
145 0.2055 0.1892 0.1750 0.1625 0.1246 0.0993 0.0813 0.0681 0.0579 0.0499 0.0435 0.0384 0.0341 0.0305 0.0274 0.0248 0.0226
150 0.2312 0.2127 0.1965 0.1823 0.1395 0.1110 0.0908 0.0759 0.0645 0.0556 0.0485 0.0427 0.0379 0.0339 0.0305 0.0276 0.0251
155 0.2575 0.2366 0.2185 0.2025 0.1546 0.1228 0.1004 0.0838 0.0712 0.0614 0.0535 0.0471 0.0418 0.0374 0.0336 0.0304 0.0277
160 0.2846 0.2612 0.2409 0.2231 0.1699 0.1347 0.1100 0.0918 0.0780 0.0671 0.0585 0.0515 0.0457 0.0408 0.0367 0.0332 0.0302
165 0.3124 0.2864 0.2639 0.2442 0.1855 0.1468 0.1197 0.0999 0.0847 0.0729 0.0635 0.0559 0.0496 0.0443 0.0398 0.0360 0.0328
170 0.3410 0.3122 0.2874 0.2657 0.2012 0.1591 0.1296 0.1080 0.0916 0.0788 0.0686 0.0603 0.0535 0.0478 0.0430 0.0389 0.0353
175 0.3705 0.3388 0.3115 0.2877 0.2173 0.1715 0.1395 0.1161 0.0984 0.0847 0.0737 0.0648 0.0574 0.0513 0.0461 0.0417 0.0379
180 0.4008 0.3660 0.3361 0.3102 0.2336 0.1840 0.1495 0.1244 0.1054 0.0906 0.0788 0.0692 0.0614 0.0548 0.0493 0.0446 0.0405
185 0.4321 0.3940 0.3614 0.3331 0.2502 0.1967 0.1597 0.1327 0.1123 0.0965 0.0839 0.0737 0.0653 0.0583 0.0524 0.0474 0.0431
190 0.4644 0.4229 0.3873 0.3567 0.2671 0.2096 0.1699 0.1411 0.1193 0.1025 0.0891 0.0782 0.0693 0.0619 0.0556 0.0503 0.0457
195 0.4978 0.4525 0.4140 0.3808 0.2842 0.2226 0.1802 0.1495 0.1264 0.1085 0.0943 0.0828 0.0733 0.0654 0.0588 0.0531 0.0483
200 0.5324 0.4831 0.4413 0.4055 0.3017 0.2358 0.1907 0.1581 0.1335 0.1145 0.0995 0.0873 0.0773 0.0690 0.0620 0.0560 0.0509

3/20
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 21 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Thermal overload

ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples

Hot curves for Es0 = 0

I/Ib 4.80 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Es (%)
105 0.0023 0.0021 0.0017 0.0014 0.0012 0.0010 0.0009 0.0008 0.0007 0.0006 0.0006 0.0005 0.0003 0.0002 0.0002 0.0001
110 0.0045 0.0042 0.0034 0.0029 0.0024 0.0021 0.0018 0.0016 0.0014 0.0013 0.0011 0.0010 0.0006 0.0004 0.0003 0.0003
115 0.0068 0.0063 0.0051 0.0043 0.0036 0.0031 0.0027 0.0024 0.0021 0.0019 0.0017 0.0015 0.0010 0.0007 0.0005 0.0004
120 0.0091 0.0084 0.0069 0.0057 0.0049 0.0042 0.0036 0.0032 0.0028 0.0025 0.0022 0.0020 0.0013 0.0009 0.0007 0.0005
125 0.0114 0.0105 0.0086 0.0072 0.0061 0.0052 0.0045 0.0040 0.0035 0.0031 0.0028 0.0025 0.0016 0.0011 0.0008 0.0006
130 0.0137 0.0126 0.0103 0.0086 0.0073 0.0063 0.0054 0.0048 0.0042 0.0038 0.0034 0.0030 0.0019 0.0013 0.0010 0.0008
135 0.0160 0.0147 0.0120 0.0101 0.0085 0.0073 0.0064 0.0056 0.0049 0.0044 0.0039 0.0035 0.0023 0.0016 0.0011 0.0009
140 0.0183 0.0168 0.0138 0.0115 0.0097 0.0084 0.0073 0.0064 0.0056 0.0050 0.0045 0.0040 0.0026 0.0018 0.0013 0.0010
145 0.0206 0.0189 0.0155 0.0129 0.0110 0.0094 0.0082 0.0072 0.0063 0.0056 0.0051 0.0046 0.0029 0.0020 0.0015 0.0011
150 0.0229 0.0211 0.0172 0.0144 0.0122 0.0105 0.0091 0.0080 0.0070 0.0063 0.0056 0.0051 0.0032 0.0022 0.0016 0.0013
155 0.0253 0.0232 0.0190 0.0158 0.0134 0.0115 0.0100 0.0088 0.0077 0.0069 0.0062 0.0056 0.0035 0.0025 0.0018 0.0014
160 0.0276 0.0253 0.0207 0.0173 0.0147 0.0126 0.0109 0.0096 0.0085 0.0075 0.0067 0.0061 0.0039 0.0027 0.0020 0.0015
165 0.0299 0.0275 0.0225 0.0187 0.0159 0.0136 0.0118 0.0104 0.0092 0.0082 0.0073 0.0066 0.0042 0.0029 0.0021 0.0016
170
175
0.0323
0.0346
0.0296
0.0317
0.0242
0.0260
0.0202
0.0217
0.0171
0.0183
0.0147
0.0157
0.0128
0.0137
0.0112
0.0120
0.0099
0.0106
0.0088
0.0094
0.0079
0.0084
0.0071
0.0076
0.0045
0.0048
0.0031
0.0034
0.0023
0.0025
0.0018
0.0019
3
180 0.0370 0.0339 0.0277 0.0231 0.0196 0.0168 0.0146 0.0128 0.0113 0.0101 0.0090 0.0081 0.0052 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
185 0.0393 0.0361 0.0295 0.0246 0.0208 0.0179 0.0155 0.0136 0.0120 0.0107 0.0096 0.0086 0.0055 0.0038 0.0028 0.0021
190 0.0417 0.0382 0.0313 0.0261 0.0221 0.0189 0.0164 0.0144 0.0127 0.0113 0.0101 0.0091 0.0058 0.0040 0.0030 0.0023
195 0.0441 0.0404 0.0330 0.0275 0.0233 0.0200 0.0173 0.0152 0.0134 0.0119 0.0107 0.0096 0.0061 0.0043 0.0031 0.0024
200 0.0464 0.0426 0.0348 0.0290 0.0245 0.0211 0.0183 0.0160 0.0141 0.0126 0.0113 0.0102 0.0065 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025

3/21
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 22 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Phase overcurrent

ANSI code 50/51

Description The Is setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve, and T is the operation time delay
The phase overcurrent function comprises for 10 Is.
4 independant elements divided into two groups The tripping time for I/Is values of less than 1.2 depends on the type of curve chosen.
of 2 elements called Group A and Group B respectively.
The use of the two groups may be chosen by Name of curve Type
parameter setting: Standard inverse time (SIT) 1.2
b operation with Group A or Group B exclusively, with Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) 1.2
switching from one group to the other dependent on the
Extremely inverse time (EIT) 1.2
state of logic input I13 exclusively, or by remote control
(TC3, TC4), Ultra inverse time (UIT) 1.2
I13 = 0 group A RI curve 1
l13 = 1 group B IEC standard inverse time SIT / A 1
b operation with Group A and Group B active for 4-set IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B 1
point operation, IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C 1
b enabling/disabling of each group of 2 elements IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) 1
(A, B).
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) 1

3 Operation
The phase overcurrent protection function is three-pole.
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F)
IAC inverse
1
1
It picks up if one, two or three of the phase currents reach IAC very inverse 1
the operation set point. IAC extremely inverse 1
It is time-delayed. The time delay may be definite time The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled "IDMT protection functions".
(DT) or IDMT according to the curves opposite.
Definite time protection The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval.
Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps, and T For currents with a very large amplitude, the protection function has a definite time
is the protection operation time delay. characteristic:
t b if I > 20 Is, tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is
b if I > 40 In, tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In.
MT10533

(In: current transformer rated current defined when the general settings are made).

Block diagram
T
DE50371

Is I
Definite time protection principle.
Timer hold delay
IDMT protection The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1:
IDMT protection operates in accordance with the b definite time (timer hold) for all the tripping curves.
IEC (60255-3), BS 142 and IEEE (C-37112) standards.
I > Is time-delayed output
MT10541

type 1
t
MT10903

type 1.2
I > Is pick-up signal

T T tripping
value of internal
time delay
counter
1 1.2 10 20 I/Is
IDMT protection principle.
T1 T1
T1

3/22
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 23 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Phase overcurrent

ANSI code 50/51

b IDMT for IEC, IEEE and IAC curves.

I > Is time-delayed output

MT10527
I > Is pick-up signal

T tripping
value of internal
time delay
counter

T1 3
Characteristics
Tripping curve
Setting Definite time,
IDMT: chosen according to list on previous page
Is set point
Setting Definite time 0.1 In y Is y 24 In expressed in Amps
IDMT 0.1 In y Is y 2.4 In expressed in Amps
Resolution 1 A or 1 digit
Accuracy (1) ±5 %
Drop out/pick-up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % (with min. reset variance of
0.015 In)
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is)
Setting Definite time inst. 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Accuracy (1) Definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
IDMT Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
Timer hold delay T1
Definite time (timer hold) 0; 0.05 to 300 s
IDMT (reset time) (3) 0.5 to 20 s
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 35 ms at 2 Is (typically 25 ms)
inst. < 50 ms at 2 Is (confirmed instantaneous)
(typically 35 ms)
Overshoot time < 35 ms
Reset time < 50 ms (for T1 = 0)
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33
Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93
Ext inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47
IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32
IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08
IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75
IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4
(3) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and IAC types.

3/23
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 24 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Earth fault

ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G

Description The Is0 setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve, and T is the operation time
The earth fault function comprises 4 independant delay for 10 Is0.
elements divided into two groups of 2 settings called The tripping time for I0/Is0 values of less than 1.2 depends on the type of curve
Group A and Group B respectively. chosen.
The use of the two elements may be chosen by
parameter setting: Name of curve Type
b operation with Group A or Group B exclusively, with Standard inverse time (SIT) 1.2
switching from one group to the other dependent on the Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) 1.2
state of logic input I13 exclusively, or by remote control Extremely inverse time (EIT) 1.2
(TC3, TC4), Ultra inverse time (UIT) 1.2
I13 = 0 group A RI curve 1
I13 = 1 group B IEC standard inverse time SIT / A 1
b operation with Group A and Group B active for 4-set IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B 1
point operation IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C 1
b enabling/disabling of each group of 2 elements IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) 1
(A, B). IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) 1

3 Operation
The earth fault protection function is single-pole.
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F)
IAC inverse
IAC very inverse
1
1
1
It picks up if the earth fault current reaches the
IAC extremely inverse 1
operation set point.
It is time-delayed. The time delay may be definite time The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled "IDMT protection functions".
(DT) or IDMT according to the curves opposite.
The protection function includes harmonic 2 restraint The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval.
which provides greater stability when transformers are For currents with a very large amplitude, the protection function has a definite time
energized (measurement of residual current by the sum characteristic:
of the 3 phase CTs). b if I0 > 20 Is0, tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is0
The restraint disables tripping, regardless of the b if I0 > 15 In0 (1), tripping time is the time that corresponds to 15 In0.
fundamental current.
The restraint may be inhibited by parameter setting. Block diagram
Definite time protection
Is0 is the operation set point expressed in Amps, and T
DE50372

is the protection operation time delay.

DE50244

Timer hold delay

The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1:
b definite time (timer hold) for all the tripping curves
DE50247

Definite time protection principle.

IDMT protection
IDMT protection operates in accordance with the
IEC (60255-3), BS 142 and IEEE (C-37112) standards.
DE50246

IDMT protection principle.

3/24
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 25 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Earth fault

ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G

b IDMT for IEC, IEEE and IAC curves.

DE50248

3
Characteristics
Tripping curvet
Setting Definite time,
IDMT: chosen according to list on previous page
Is0 set point
Definite time setting 0.1 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 expressed in Amps
Sum of CTs (1) 0.1 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0
With CSH sensor
2 A rating 0.2 A to 30 A
20 A rating 2 A to 300 A
CT + CSH30 0.1 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT
with ACE990 0.1 In0 < Is0 < 15 In0
IDMT time setting 0.1 In0 y Is0 y In0 (1) expressed in Amps
Sum of CTs (1) 0.1 In0 y Is0 y In0
With CSH sensor
2 A rating 0.2 A to 2 A
20 A rating 2 A to 20 A
CT + CSH30 0.1 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT
with ACE990 0.1 In0 y Is0 y In0
Resolution 0.1 A or 1 digit
Accuracy (2) ±5 %
Drop out/pick-up ratio 93.5 % ±5 % for Is0 > 0.1 In0
Harmonic 2 restraint
Fixed threshold 17 %
(1) In0 = In if the sum of the three phase currents is used Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is0)
for the measurement. Setting Definite time inst. 50 ms y T y 300 s
In0 = sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH
IDMT (3) 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (3)
core balance CT.
In0 = In of the CT if the measurement is taken by a 1 A Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
or 5 A current transformer. Accuracy (2) Definite time ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
(2) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). IDMT class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
(3) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
Timer hold delay T1
Inverse (SIT) and IECIEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20
Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33 Definite time
Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B: 0.01 to 0.93 (timer hold) 0; 0.05 to 300 s
Ext inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47 IDMT (4) 0.5 to 300 s
IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86
Characteristic times
IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57
IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32 Operation time pick-up < 35 ms at 2 Is0 (typically 25 ms)
IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08 inst. < 50 ms at 2 Is0 (confirmed instantaneous)
IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75 (typically 35 ms)
IAC extremely inverse: 1.08 to 134.4
Overshoot time < 35 ms
(4) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and
IAC types. Reset time < 40 ms (for T1 = 0)

3/25
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 26 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Phase-to-phase overvoltage

ANSI code 59

Operation
This protection is three-phase:
b it picks up when one of the phase-to-phase voltages concerned is greater than
the Us set point
b the protection includes a definite time delay.

Block diagram
U21
T 0
MT10876

time-delayed output
U32 U > Us

U13 “pick-up” signal

Characteristics
3 Us set point
Setting 50 % Unp to 150 % Unp (2)
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 97 % ±1 %
Time delay T
Setting 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 35 ms (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time < 35 ms
Reset time < 40 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) 135 % Unp with TP 230 V / 3.

3/26
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 27 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Neutral voltage displacement

ANSI code 59N

Operation
The protection function picks up if the residual voltage V0 is above a Vs0 set point,
with V0 = V1 + V2 + V3 ,
b it includes a definite time delay T
b the residual voltage is either calculated from the 3 phase voltages or measured by
an external VT.

DE50249
Block diagram

Characteristics
3
Vs0 set point
Setting 2 % Unp to 80 % Unp if Vns0 (2) = sum of 3Vs
2 % Unp to 80 % Unp if Vns0 (2) = Uns/3
5 % Unp to 80 % Unp if Vns0 (2) = Uns/3
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±0.005 Unp
Resolution 1%
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 97 % ±1 %
Time delay T
Setting 50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time pick-up < 55 ms
Overshoot time < 35 ms
Reset time < 55 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Vns0 is one of the general settings.

3/27
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 28 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Starts per hour

ANSI code 66

Operation
This function is three-phase.
It picks up when the number of starts reaches the following limits:
b maximum number of starts allowed per period of time (P) (Nt)
b maximum allowed number of consecutive hot starts (Nh)
b maximum allowed number of consecutive cold starts (Nc).
The function indicates:
b the number of starts still allowed before the maximum, if the protection has not
picked up. The number of starts depends on the motor’s thermal state
b waiting time before a start is allowed, if the protection has picked up.
Starting is detected when the current consumed becomes greater than 10 % of the
Ib current.
User information
The following information is available for the user:
b the waiting time before a start is allowed
b the number of starts still allowed.

3 See chapter "Machine operation assistance functions".

The number of consecutive starts is the number starts counted during the last P/Nt
minutes, Nt being the number of starts allowed per period.
The motor hot state corresponds to the overshooting of the fixed set point (50 % heat
rise) of the thermal overload function.
When the motor re-accelerates, it undergoes a stress similar to that of starting
without the current first passing through a value less than 10 % of Ib, in which case
the number of starts is not incremented.
It is possible however to increment the number of starts when a re-acceleration
occurs by a logic data input (input I22).

Block diagram
MT10871

k1 > Nt
&
I1 0 T
I2 I > 0.1Ib P mn
I3
≥1 inhibit
≥1 k2 > Nc closing
input I22

P mn/Nt

& k3 > Nh
thermal alarm
(hot state)
P mn/Nt
"Clear"

Characteristics
Period of time (P)
Setting 1 to 6 hour
Resolution 1
Nt total number of starts
Setting 1 to 60
Resolution 1
Nh and Nc number of consecutive starts
Setting (1) 1 to Nt
Resolution 1
T time delay between starts
Setting 0 mn y T y 90 mn
Resolution 1 mn or 1 digit
(1) With Nc y Nf.

3/28
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 29 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Recloser

ANSI code 79

Operation
Initialization of the recloser
The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met:
b "CB control" function activated and recloser in service
b circuit breaker closed
b inhibition time delay not running
b none of the recloser inhibition conditions is true (see further on).

Recloser cycles
b case of a cleared fault:
v following a reclosing order, if the fault does not appear after the memory time delay
has run out, the recloser reinitializes and a message appears on the display (see
example 1)
b case of a fault that is not cleared:
v following instantaneous or time-delayed tripping by the protection unit, activation
of the isolation time delay associated with the first active cycle.
At the end of the time delay, a closing order is given, which activates the memory time
delay. 3
If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay, a tripping order
is given and the following reclosing cycle is activated.
v after all the active cycles have been run, if the fault still persists, a final trip order
is given, a message appears on the display and closing is locked out until
acknowledgment takes place, according to the parameter setting of the protection
function
b closing on a fault.
If the circuit breaker closes on a fault, or if the fault appears before the end of the
lockout time delay, the recloser is inhibited.

Recloser inhibition conditions

The recloser is inhibited according to the following conditions:
b voluntary open or close order
b recloser put out of service
b receipt of a lockout order on the lockout logic input I26
b appearance of a switchgear-related fault, such as trip circuit fault, or unexecture
control order fault
b opening of the circuit breaker by external tripping via inputs I21, I22 or I23.

Characteristics
Reclosing cycles Setting
Number of cycles 1 to 4
Activation of cycle 1 (1) overcurrent 1 inst. / delayed / inactive
overcurrent 2 inst. / delayed / inactive
earth fault 1 inst. / delayed / inactive
earth fault 2 inst. / delayed / inactive
Activation of cycles 2, 3 and 4 (1) overcurrent 1 inst. / delayed / inactive
overcurrent 2 inst. / delayed / inactive
earth fault 1 inst. / delayed / inactive
earth fault 2 inst. / delayed / inactive
Time delays
Memory time delay 0.05 to 300 s
Isolation time delay cycle 1 0.05 to 300 s
cycle 2 0.05 to 300 s
cycle 3 0.05 to 300 s
cycle 4 0.05 to 300 s
Lockout time delay 0.05 to 300 s
Accuracy ±2 % or 25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
(1) If a protection function that is inactive in relation to the recloser leads to circuit breaker
opening, the recloser is inhibited.

3/29
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 30 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Recloser

ANSI code 79

Example 1: case of successful reclosing after the first cycle. Activation with 300 ms time-delayed O/C protection
MT10879

Instantaneous O/C

300 ms
Time-delayed O/C

I12 (closed position)

inhibition time delay

CB open command

3 I11 (open position)

cycle 1 isolation time delay

disengagement
CB close command time delay

Reclosing in
progress (TS35)
“cleared fault”
Reclosing message
successful (TS37)

Example 2: case of definitive tripping after two cycles activated by 300 ms time-delayed O/C protection

Instantaneous O/C
MT10880

300 ms 300 ms 300 ms

Time-delayed O/C

inhibition time
I12 (closed position) delay

CB open command

cycle 1 cycle 2
I11 (open position) isolation time isolation
delay time delay

CB close command

Reclosing in
progress (TS35)
“permanent fault”
message
Definitive tripping
(TS37)

3/30
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 31 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Overfrequency

ANSI code 81H

Operation
The protection function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is
above the set point and the positive sequence voltage is more than 20 % of Vnp
(Unp/3).
If a single VT is connected (U21), the function picks up when the frequency is higher
than the set point and the U21 voltage is more than 20 % of Unp.
It includes a definite time delay T.

MT10542
Block diagram
U32
Vd T 0
U21 & F > Fs time-delayed output

“pick-up” signal

(1)
Vd > 0.2 Vnp

(1) or U21 > 0.2 Unp if only one VT.

3
If there is only one sensor (U21), the voltage signal is connected to terminals 1
and 2 of the connector CCT640, whatever the phase.

Characteristics
Fs set points
Setting 50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz
Resolution 0.1 Hz
Accuracy (1) ±0.1 Hz
Pick-up / drop-out difference 0.2 Hz ±0.1 Hz
Time delay T
Setting 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time pick-up < 100 ms (typically 80 ms)
Overshoot time < 100 ms
Reset time < 100 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.

3/31
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 32 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Underfrequency

ANSI code 81L

Operation
The function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is below the set
point and if the negative sequence voltage is more than 20 % of Vnp (Unp 3).
If a single VT is connected (U21), the function picks up when the frequency is below
the set point and the U21 voltage is more than 20 % of Unp.
It includes a definite time delay T.

Block diagram
U32
Vd T 0
MT10543

U21 & F < Fs time-delayed output

“pick-up” sortie

(1)
Vd > 0.2 Vnp

3 (1) Or U21 > 0.2 Unp if only one VT.

If there is only one sensor (U21), the voltage signal is connected to terminals 1
and 2 of the connector CCT640, whatever the phase.

Characteristics
Fs set points
Setting 45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz
Resolution 0.1 Hz
Accuracy (1) ±0.1 Hz
Pick-up / drop-out difference 0.2 Hz ±0.1 Hz
Time delay T
Setting 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1) ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time pick-up < 100 ms (typically 80 ms)
Overshoot time < 100 ms
Reset time < 100 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.

3/32
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 33 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions Rate of change of frequency

ANSI code 81R

Operation
This function picks up when the rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) of the positive
sequence voltage overshoots the set point.
If only one VT is connected (U21), the function is inhibited.
It includes a definite time delay T.

Block diagram
MT10877
< Fmax > + dFs/dt
Vd
f
T 0 time delayed
> Fmin & dF/dt 1 output

signal “pick-up”
> 0.5 Vn < - dFs/dt

3
Characteristics
dFs/dt set point
Setting 0.1 to 10 Hz/s
Resolution 0.1 Hz/s
Accuracy tripping ±5 % or ±0.1 Hz/s
no tripping ±3 % or ±0.05 Hz/s
Time delay T
Setting 100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy ±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution 10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time pick-up < 170 ms (130 ms typical)
Overshoot time < 100 ms
Reset time < 100 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).

3/33
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 34 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions General

IDMT protection functions

General The time delay setting that should be made in order for the operation curve to pass
Operation time depends on the type of protection through the point k (Ik, tk) is:
(phase current, earth fault current, …). ts
Operation is represented by a characteristic curve: tk
T = Ts10 × ---------

MT10537
b t = f(I) curve for the phase overcurrent function tsk
b t = f(I0) curve for the earth fault function.
The rest of the document is based on t = f(I); the
reasoning may be extended to other variables I0,… tk k
The curve is defined by:
b type (standard inverse, very inverse, extremely tsk
inverse...) Ts10
b current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical
asymptote of the curve
b time delay T which corresponds to the operation time
for I = 10 Is. 1 Ik/Is 10 I/Is

These 3 settings are made chronologically in the Another practical method:

3 following order: type, Is current, time delay T.
Changing the time delay T setting by x % changes all of
The table on the next page gives the values of
ts I
the operation times in the curve by x %. K = ------------ as a function of -----
ts10 Is

tsk
Examples of problems to be solved In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay, read the value K = --------------
Ik Ts10
Problem 1 in the line for -----
Is
Knowing the type of IDMT, determine the Is current and
time delay T settings. The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the
tk
Theoretically, the current setting Is corresponds to the point k (Ik, tk) is: T = -----
maximum current that may be permanent: it is generally k
the rated current of the protected equipment (cable,
Example
transformer).
Data:
The time delay T is set to the operation point at 10 Is on
type of time delay: standard inverse time (SIT)
the curve. This setting is determined taking into
set point: Is
account the constraints involved in discrimination with
a point k on the operation curve: k (3.5 Is; 4 s)
the upstream and downstream protection devices.
The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of
Question: What is the time delay T setting (operation time at 10 Is)?
point A on the operation curve (IA, tA), e.g. the point
that corresponds to the maximum fault current affecting
Reading of the table: SIT column
the downstream protection device. I
line ----- = 3, 5
Is
Problem 2
Knowing the type of IDMT, the current setting Is and a K = 1.86
4
point k (Ik, tk) on the operation curve, determine the Answer: The time delay setting is T = ------------- = 2, 15s
1, 86
time delay setting T.
On the standard curve of the same type, read the
Problem 3
operation time tsk that corresponds to the relative
Knowing the current Is and time delay T settings for a type of time delay (standard
current
inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse), find the operation time for a current value
lk
----- of IA.
ls
On the standard curve of the same type, read the operation time tsA that corresponds
and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the to the relative current
relative current
IA
I
----- = 10 ------
Is
Is
I
and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current ----- = 10
Is
The operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings is
T
tA = tsA × --------------
Ts10 ts
MT10538

tA
T
tsA
Ts10

1 IA/Is 10 I/Is

3/34
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 35 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions General

IDMT protection functions

Another practical method: the table below gives the Example

values of Data:
ts I b type of time delay: very inverse time (VIT)
K = -------------- as a function of -----
Ts10 Is b set point: Is
b time delay T = 0.8 s.
In the column that corresponds to the type
tsA Question: What is the operation time for the current IA = 6 Is?
of time delay, read the value K = -------------- Reading of the table: VIT column
Ts10
IA I
on the line for ------ line ----- = 6
Is Is
The operation time tA for the current IA Answer: The operation time for the current IA is t = 1.80 x 0.8 = 1.44 s.
with the Is and T settings is tA = K. T

Table of values of K
I/Is SIT VIT, LTI EIT UIT RI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE EI IAC I IAC VI IAC EI
and IEC/A and IEC/B and IEC/C (IEC/D) (IEC/E) (IEC/F)
1.0
1.1
1.2
—
24.700 (1)
12.901
—
90.000 (1)
45.000
—
471.429 (1)
225.000
—
—
545.905
3.062
2.534
2.216
—
22.461
11.777
—
136.228
65.390
—
330.606
157.946
62.005
19.033
9.413
62.272
45.678
34.628
200.226
122.172
82.899
3
1.5 5.788 18.000 79.200 179.548 1.736 5.336 23.479 55.791 3.891 17.539 36.687
2.0 3.376 9.000 33.000 67.691 1.427 3.152 10.199 23.421 2.524 7.932 16.178
2.5 2.548 6.000 18.857 35.490 1.290 2.402 6.133 13.512 2.056 4.676 9.566
3.0 2.121 4.500 12.375 21.608 1.212 2.016 4.270 8.970 1.792 3.249 6.541
3.5 1.858 3.600 8.800 14.382 1.161 1.777 3.242 6.465 1.617 2.509 4.872
4.0 1.676 3.000 6.600 10.169 1.126 1.613 2.610 4.924 1.491 2.076 3.839
4.5 1.543 2.571 5.143 7.513 1.101 1.492 2.191 3.903 1.396 1.800 3.146
5.0 1.441 2.250 4.125 5.742 1.081 1.399 1.898 3.190 1.321 1.610 2.653
5.5 1.359 2.000 3.385 4.507 1.065 1.325 1.686 2.671 1.261 1.473 2.288
6.0 1.292 1.800 2.829 3.616 1.053 1.264 1.526 2.281 1.211 1.370 2.007
6.5 1.236 1.636 2.400 2.954 1.042 1.213 1.402 1.981 1.170 1.289 1.786
7.0 1.188 1.500 2.063 2.450 1.033 1.170 1.305 1.744 1.135 1.224 1.607
7.5 1.146 1.385 1.792 2.060 1.026 1.132 1.228 1.555 1.105 1.171 1.460
8.0 1.110 1.286 1.571 1.751 1.019 1.099 1.164 1.400 1.078 1.126 1.337
8.5 1.078 1.200 1.390 1.504 1.013 1.070 1.112 1.273 1.055 1.087 1.233
9.0 1.049 1.125 1.238 1.303 1.008 1.044 1.068 1.166 1.035 1.054 1.144
9.5 1.023 1.059 1.109 1.137 1.004 1.021 1.031 1.077 1.016 1.026 1.067
10.0 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
10.5 0.979 0.947 0.906 0.885 0.996 0.981 0.973 0.934 0.985 0.977 0.941
11.0 0.959 0.900 0.825 0.787 0.993 0.963 0.950 0.877 0.972 0.957 0.888
11.5 0.941 0.857 0.754 0.704 0.990 0.947 0.929 0.828 0.960 0.939 0.841
12.0 0.925 0.818 0.692 0.633 0.988 0.932 0.912 0.784 0.949 0.922 0.799
12.5 0.910 0.783 0.638 0.572 0.985 0.918 0.896 0.746 0.938 0.907 0.761
13.0 0.895 0.750 0.589 0.518 0.983 0.905 0.882 0.712 0.929 0.893 0.727
13.5 0.882 0.720 0.546 0.471 0.981 0.893 0.870 0.682 0.920 0.880 0.695
14.0 0.870 0.692 0.508 0.430 0.979 0.882 0.858 0.655 0.912 0.868 0.667
14.5 0.858 0.667 0.473 0.394 0.977 0.871 0.849 0.631 0.905 0.857 0.641
15.0 0.847 0.643 0.442 0.362 0.976 0.861 0.840 0.609 0.898 0.846 0.616
15.5 0.836 0.621 0.414 0.334 0.974 0.852 0.831 0.589 0.891 0.837 0.594
16.0 0.827 0.600 0.388 0.308 0.973 0.843 0.824 0.571 0.885 0.828 0.573
16.5 0.817 0.581 0.365 0.285 0.971 0.834 0.817 0.555 0.879 0.819 0.554
17.0 0.808 0.563 0.344 0.265 0.970 0.826 0.811 0.540 0.874 0.811 0.536
17.5 0.800 0.545 0.324 0.246 0.969 0.819 0.806 0.527 0.869 0.804 0.519
18.0 0.792 0.529 0.307 0.229 0.968 0.812 0.801 0.514 0.864 0.797 0.504
18.5 0.784 0.514 0.290 0.214 0.967 0.805 0.796 0.503 0.860 0.790 0.489
19.0 0.777 0.500 0.275 0.200 0.966 0.798 0.792 0.492 0.855 0.784 0.475
19.5 0.770 0.486 0.261 0.188 0.965 0.792 0.788 0.482 0.851 0.778 0.463
20.0 0.763 0.474 0.248 0.176 0.964 0.786 0.784 0.473 0.848 0.772 0.450
(1) Values only suitable for IEC A, B and C curves.

3/35
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 36 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions General

IDMT protection functions

Standard inverse time SIT curve Extremely inverse time EIT curve
Very inverse time VIT or LTI curve Ultra inverse time UIT curve
t (s) t (s)
100.00 1 000.00
MT10539

MT10540

100.00

10.00

curve (T = 1s)

curve (T = 1s)

3 10.00

1.00 RI

inverse time SIT

1.00

very inverse time VIT or LTI

extremely inverse EIT

ultra inverse UIT

I/Is
I/Is 0.10
0.10
1 10 100
1 10 100

IEEE curves IAC curves

t (s) t (s)
10000.00 1 000.00
MT10528

MT10529

1000.00

100.00

VI
100.00

MI EI

VI
10.00

EI

10.00

1.00

1.00

I/Is
0.10 I/Is 0.10
1 10 100 1 10 100

3/36
PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 37 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

Protection functions General

IDMT protection functions

Curve equations
IEC curve, inverse type Characteristic curves k α β
k T IEC standard inverse / A 0.14 0.02 2.97
- × ---
t d ( I ) = ----------------------
I α
 ---- β IEC very inverse / B 13.5 1 1.50
- –1
 Is IEC long time inverse / B 120 1 13.33
IEC curve, RI type IEC extremely inverse / C 80 2 0.808
IEC ultra inverse 315.2 2.5 1
1 T
t d ( I ) = ------------------------------------------------------ × -------------------
 I  – 1 3, 1706
0, 339 – 0,236  ----
Is

IEEE curve Characteristic curves A B p β

  IEEE moderately inverse 0.010 0.023 0.02 0.241
  IEEE very inverse 3.922 0.098 2 0.138
A T
t d ( I ) = ----------------------- + B × ---
 IEEE extremely inverse 5.64 0.0243 2 0.081
 I P  β
  ---- – 1 
  I s 

3
IAC curve Characteristic curves A B C D E β
IAC inverse 0.208 0.863 0.800 -0.418 0.195 0.297
 
 B D E  T IAC very inverse 0.090 0.795 0.100 -1.288 7.958 0.165
t d ( I ) = A + -------------------- + ----------------------2- + ----------------------3- x -----
 I I I β IAC extremely inverse 0.004 0.638 0.620 1.787 0.246 0.092

----
Is- – C ----
  - – C  
---- - – C  
Is Is

ts IEC curve VIT type TMS multiplying factor

The time delay of IDMT tripping curves (except for RI curve) may be set:
MT10530

b either by T sec (operation time at 10 x Is)

TMS = 1 T
b or by TMS (factor that corresponds to --- in the equations above).
β
Example :
13, 5 T
t ( I ) = -------------------- × TMS with: TMS = ---------
T = 1.5 sec I
 ----- – 1 1 ,5
 Is
The IEC curve of the VIT type is positioned so as to be the same with
TMS = 1 or T = 1.5 sec.

10 I/Is
Example: TMS multiplying factor. Timer hold delay T1
b definite time:
enables the function to be activated with intermittent faults
tr
b IDMT:
MT10531

makes it possible to emulate an electromagnetic disk protection relay.

T1 T
TMS = 1 t r ( I ) = ----------------------2 × --- with : T
--- = TMS
I β β
1 –  -----
 Is

T1
T1 = timer hold delay setting (timer hold delay for I reset = 0 and TMS = 1)
T = tripping time delay setting (at 10 Is)
k
β = basic tripping curve value at 10 Is = -------------------
α
10 – 1
0 1 I/Is The standardized or estimated values of T1 are available in the SFT2841 software
Example: IDMT timer hold delay T1. help.

3/37
 PCRED301005EN_3-Protection_2004.FM Page 38 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:45 14

3/38
PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004TDM.fm Page 1 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 4:03 16

Control and monitoring Contents

functions

Description 4/2
Definition of symbols 4/3
Assignment of logic inputs / outputs 4/4
Circuit breaker / contactor control 4/5
Logic discrimination 4/8
Disturbance recording triggering
Switching of groups of settings 4/10
Indications 4/11
Control matrix 4/13

23 juillet 2004 4/1

 PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 2 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Description

functions

Sepam performs the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network
operation.

Predefined functions
The main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent
cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter
setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned.
The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs
by customization of the control matrix using the SFT2841 software.

Control matrix
The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from:
b protection functions
b predefined control and monitoring functions
b logic inputs
to the following output data:
b output relays
b 9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam
b triggering of disturbance recording.

Operating principle
The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3
phases:
b acquisition of input data:
v results of protection function processing
4 v external logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES114 input /
output module
v remote control orders (TC) received via the Modbus communication link
b actual processing of the control and monitoring function
b utilization of the processing results:
v activation of output relays to control an actuator
v information sent to the facility manager:
- by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software
- by remote indication (TS) via the Modbus communication link
DE51156

4/2
PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 3 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Definition of symbols

functions

The symbols used in the different block Pulse mode operation

diagrams describing the control b "on" pulse: used to create a short-duration pulse (1 cycle) each time a signal
and monitoring functions are defined appears
on this page.

DE50681
Logic functions
b "OR"
DE50675

Equation: S = X + Y + Z.
b "off" pulse: used to create a short-duration pulse (1 cycle)
b "AND" each time a signal disappears.
DE50676

DE50682

Equation: S = X x Y x Z.

b exclusive "XOR"
4
DE50677

Nota : the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power failure.

S = 1 if one and only one input is set to 1
(S = 1 if X + Y + Z = 1). Bistable functions
Bistable functions may be used to store values.
b Complement
These functions may use the complement of one or
DE50683

more input values.

DE50678

Equation: S = X (S = 1 if X = 0).

Delay timers
Two types of delay timers:
b "on" delay timer: used to delay the appearance of a
signal by a time T

Equation: B = S + R x B.
DE50679

b "off" delay timer: used to delay the disappearance of

a signal by a time T.
DE50680

4/3
 PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 4 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Assignment of logic

functions inputs / outputs

The use of the preset control and monitoring functions requires exclusive parameter
setting and particular wiring of the inputs according to their application and the type
of Sepam.
The advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software may be used to assign inputs and set
the control and monitoring function parameters.
Since an input may only be assigned to a single function, not all the functions are
available at the same time.
Example: if the logic discrimination function is used, the switching of groups of
settings function may not be used.

Assignment by application chart

Functions S20 T20 M20 B21 - B22 Assignment
Logic inputs
Open position b b b b I11
Closed position b b b b I12
Logic discrimination, receive BL b b I13
Switching of groups of settings A/B b b b
External reset b b b b I14
External tripping 4 (1) b b b b
External tripping 1 (1) b b (2) b b I21
External network synchronization b b b b
External tripping 2 (1) b b (3) b b I22

4 Motor reacceleration
External tripping 3 (1)
Buchholz alarm (1) (Buchholz alarm message)
b b (4)
b
b
b b I23

Rotor rotation detection b

Thermistor tripping (1) b b
End of charging position b b b I24
Thermostat alarm (1) (thermostat alarm message) b
Thermistor alarm (1) b b
Inhibit remote control (1) b b b b I25
SF6-1 b b b b
SF6-2 b b b b I26
Change of thermal settings b b
Inhibit thermal overload b b
Inhibit recloser b
Logic outputs
Tripping b b b b O1
Inhibit closing b b b b O2
Watchdog b b b b O4
Closing order b b b b O11
Note: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 control matrix for other non predefined applications.
(1) These inputs have parameter setting with the prefix "NEG" for undervoltage type operation.
(2) Buchholz/Gas trip message.
(3) Thermostat trip message.
(4) Pressure trip message.

4/4
PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 5 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Circuit breaker / contactor control

functions ANSI code 94/69

Description
Sepam may be used to control breaking devices equipped with different types of
closing and tripping coils.
b circuit breaker with shut trip or undervoltage tripping coil (parameter set on the
front of the advanced UMI or in SFT2841)
b latching contactor with shunt trip coil.
Two breaking device control modes are available:
b use of operating mechanism integrated in the circuit breaker / contactor
This logical function processes all the circuit breaker closing and tripping conditions
based on:
v breaking device status information
v remote control orders
v protection functions
v specific program logic for each application (e.g. recloser)
v etc.
This function also inhibits closing of the breaking device according to the operating
conditions.
b use of customized program logic
A control and monitoring resource assignment matrix may be used to create
customized program logic.

Operating mechanism integrated in the circuit breaker /

contactor
For operation in accordance with the block diagram, the Sepam must have the logic
inputs required (an MES114 module must therefore be included) and the related
parameter setting and wiring must be done.
4
Remote tripping
Circuit breaker / contactor tripping may be controlled remotely via the communication
link.
The circuit breaker / contactor tripping order may be activated at any time and is not
inhibited by logic input I25.
Circuit breaker / contactor closing orders and Sepam acknowledgment via the
communication link may be inhibited by logic input I25.

Circuit breaker / contactor control with lockout function

(ANSI 86)
The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays may be carried out by
Sepam using the predefined Circuit breaker / contactor control function, with latching
of all tripping conditions (protection function outputs and logic inputs).
With this function, Sepam performs the following:
b grouping of all tripping conditions and breaking device control
b latching of the tripping order with inhibition of closing until the cause of tripping
disappears and is acknowledged by the user (see "Latching / acknowledgment")
b indication of the cause of tripping:
v locally by signal lamps ("Trip" and others) and by messages on the display
v remotely by remote indications.

4/5
 PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 6 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Circuit breaker / contactor control

functions ANSI code 94/69

Block diagram (1): Sepam S20, T20 or M20

DE50373

Block diagram (1): Sepam B21 (3) or B22

DE50374

(1) Data used in the logic block diagram depend on the Sepam type, availability of MES114
option and general parameters.
(2) The usual case in which O2 is set to “undervoltage coil” (normaly closed).
(3) Performs B20 type functions.

4/6
PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 7 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Circuit breaker / contactor control

functions

Latching / acknowledgment
The tripping outputs of all the protection functions and all the logic inputs may be
MT10188

latched individually.
Logic outputs may not be latched. The logic outputs set up in pulse mode maintain
pulse-type operation, even when linked to latched data.
Latched data are saved in the event of a power failure.
All latched data may be acknowledged locally on the UMI, or remotely by means of
a logic input or via the communication link.
The "Latching / acknowledgment" function associated with the "Circuit breaker /
contactor control" function may be used to perform the ANSI 86 "lockout relay"
function.

TC/circuit breaker position discrepancy

This function detects a discrepancy between the last remote control order received
MT10189

and the actual position of the circuit breaker.

The information is accessible via remote indication TS42.

A D Trip circuit supervision and open / closed matching

4
MT10190

5 Description
+
O1 _ This supervision is designed for trip circuits:
4 b with shunt trip units
The function detects:
M v circuit continuity
1 v loss of supply
I11
2 v mismatching of position contacts.
I12 4 The function inhibits closing of the breaking device.
5 b with undervoltage trip units
The function detects mismatching of position contacts, coil supervision being
Wiring for shunt trip unit. unnecessary in this case.
The information is accessible in the matrix and via the remote indication TS43.

A Block diagram (1)

MT10191

5 +
O1 _
MT10192

4 D

M
1
I11
2
I12 4
5

Wiring for undervoltage trip unit. (1) With MES option.

The function is activated if inputs I11 and I12 are set respectively as circuit breaker "open
position" and circuit breaker "closed position".

Open and close order supervision

Following a circuit breaker open or close order, the system checks whether, after a
200 ms time delay, the circuit breaker has actually changed status.
If the circuit breaker status does not match the last order sent, a "Control fault"
message and remote indication TS45 are generated.

4/7
 PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 8 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Logic discrimination

functions ANSI code 68

Description With this type of system, time delays are set in accordance with the device to be
This function provides: protected, without any concern for the discrimination aspect.
b full tripping discrimination
b a substantial reduction in delayed tripping of the
Operating principle
circuit breakers located nearest the source (drawback
of the classical time-based discrimination process). sending of BI

MT10195
The system applies to the definite time (DT) and IDMT
phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions.

O3
level "n+1"
MT10196

Sepam

-
+
td : X+0.9s
O3 output
other level O3
"n" Sepam level "n"
td : X+0.6s
Sepam

td : X+0.3s

4 receipt of BI
td : Xs
When a fault occurs in a radial network, the fault current flows through the circuit
between the source and the location of the fault:
b the protection units upstream from the fault are triggered
e.g.: Radial distribution with use of time-based discrimination b the protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered
(td: tripping time definite time curves). b only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip.
Each Sepam is capable of sending and receiving blocking input orders except for
motor Sepams (1) which can only send blocking input orders.
When a Sepam is triggered by a fault current:
MT10197

b it sends a blocking input order to output O3 (2)

b it trips the associated circuit breaker if it does not receive a blocking input order on
the blocking input logic input (3).
The sending of the blocking input lasts the time it takes to clear the fault.
It is interrupted after a time delay that takes into account the breaking device
td : Xs operating time and protection unit reset time.
MERLIN GERIN

This system minimizes the duration of the fault, optimizes discrimination and
guarantees safety in downgraded situations (wiring or switchgear failure).
td : Xs

Pilote wire test

MERLIN GERIN

td : Xs The pilot wire test may be performed using the output relay test function.
MERLIN GERIN

BI order
(1) Motor Sepams are not affected by the receipt of a blocking input since they are designed for
td : Xs loads only.
MERLIN GERIN
(2) Default parameter setting.
(3) According to parameter setting and presence of an additional MES114 module.

e.g.: radial distribution with use of the Sepam logic

discrimination system.

4/8
PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 9 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Logic discrimination

functions ANSI code 68

Block diagram: Sepam S20 and T20

DE50375

4
Block diagram: Sepam M20
DE50376

(1) According to parameter setting (O3 by default).

(2) Instantaneous action (inst) corresponds to protection "pick-up" signal information.

4/9
 PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 10 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Disturbance recording triggering

functions Switching of groups of settings

Disturbance recording trigger

Description
The recording of analog and logic signals may be triggered by different events,
according to control matrix parameter setting or by manual action:
b triggering by the grouping of all pick-up signals of the protection functions in
service
b triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions
b triggering by selected logic inputs
b manual triggering by a remote control order (TC10)
b manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool.

Disturbance recording may be:

b inhibited via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order (TC8)
b validated via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order (TC9).

Block diagram
DE51139

Switching of groups of settings

There are 4 relays for the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions, split
into two groups of 2 relays, called group A and group B respectively.
The use of the protection relays is determined by parameter setting.
The switching of groups of settings function enables the group A or group B
protection functions to be activated:
b according to the status of logic input I13
v I13 = 0: activation of group A
v I13 = 1: activation of group B
b or via the communication link
v TC3: activation of group A
v TC4: activation of group B.
The use of the switching of groups of settings functions does not exclude the use of
the logic discrimination function.

4/10
PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 11 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Indications

functions ANSI code 30

Events may be indicated on the front panel of Sepam Message type indication
by:
Predefined messages
b appearance of a message on the display of the
All the messages connected to the standard Sepam functions are predefined and
advanced UMI
available in two language versions:
b lighting up of one of the 9 yellow signal lamps.
b in English, factory messages, not modifiable
b in the local language, according to the version delivered.
The language version is chosen at the time of Sepam parameter setting.
The messages are visible on the display units of Sepams equipped with the
advanced UMI and in the SFT2841 Alarms screen.
b the number and type of predefined messages depend on type of Sepam. The table
below gives the complete list of all predefined messages.

List of messages (1)

Functions English (factory) French
Phase overcurrent PHASE FAULT DEFAUT PHASE
Earth fault EARTH FAULT DEFAUT TERRE
Thermal overload THERMAL ALARM ECHAUFT. ALARME
THERMAL TRIP ECHAUFT. DECLT.
Negative sequence / unbalance UNBALANCE DESEQUILIBRE
Locked rotor / ROTOR BLOCKING BLOCAGE ROTOR
Locked rotor on start STRT LOCKED ROTR. BLOC ROTOR DEM
Excessive starting time LONG START DEMARRAGE LONG
Starts per hour START INHIBIT DEMARRAGE INHIBE
Phase undercurrent
Phase-to-phase overvoltage
UNDER CURRENT
OVERVOLTAGE
COURANT <<
TENSION >>
4
Phase-to-phase undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE TENSION <<
Positive sequence undervoltage UNDERVOLTAGE TENSION <<
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage UNDERVOLT. V1 TENSION << V1
UNDERVOLT. V2 TENSION << V2
UNDERVOLT. V3 TENSION << V3
Neutral voltage displacement Vo FAULT DEFAUT Vo
Overfrequency OVER FREQ. FREQUENCE >>
Underfrequency UNDER FREQ. FREQUENCE <<
Rate of change of frequency ROCOF DERIV. FREQ.
Temperature monitoring (2) OVER TEMP. ALM T° ALARME
OVER TEMP. TRIP T°. DECLT.
RTD’S FAULT DEFAUT SONDES
Thermostat (3) THERMOST. ALARM THERMOT. ALARME
THERMOST. TRIP THERMOST. DECLT.
Buchholz (3) BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH ALARME
BUCHH/GAS TRIP BUCHH/GAZ DECLT.
Pressure (3) PRESSURE TRIP PRESSION DECLT.
Thermistor PTC/NTC THERMIST. ALARM THERMIST. ALARME
THERMIST. TRIP THERMIST. DECLT.
Trip circuit supervision TRIP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DECLT.
Circuit breaker / contactor control CONTROL FAULT DEFAUT COMDE.
Recloser PERMANENT FAULT DEFAUT PERMANT.
Recloser CLEARED FAULT DEFAUT ELIMINE
(1) According to type of Sepam and Sepam equipped with advanced UMI, or SFT2841. Messages by default, the wording of the messages may be changed (please
consult us).
(2) RTD fault message: refer to the maintenance chapter.
(3) According to parameter setting logic input I21 to I24 (T20 type).

4/11
 PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 12 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Indications

functions ANSI code 30

Message processing on the advanced UMI display

DE51148

When an event occurs, the related message appears on the advanced UMI display.
clear
The user presses the key to clear the message and be able to consult all the
advanced UMI screens in the normal fashion.
reset
The user must press the key to acknowledge latched events (e.g. protection
outputs).
The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history ( key), in which the
last 64 messages are stored.
To delete the messages stored in the alarm history:
b display the alarm history on the advanced UMI
b press the
clear
key.

Alarm message on the advanced UMI. Signal lamp type indication

The 9 yellow signal lamps on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the
following events:
Signal Event Label on
lamp front panel
LED 1 Tripping of protection 50/51 unit 1 I>51
LED 2 Tripping of protection 50/51 unit 2 I>>51
LED 3 Tripping of protection 50N/51N unit 1 Io>51N
LED 4 Tripping of protection 50N/51N unit 2 Io>>51N
4 LED 5
LED 6
Ext

LED 7 Circuit breaker open (I11) (1) 0 off

LED 8 Circuit breaker closed (I12) (1) I on
LED 9 Tripping by circuit breaker control Trip
(1) Assignment by default with MES114.

The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software:
b the assignment of signal lamps to events is to be defined in the control matrix
screen
b editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the "Sepam" menu.

4/12
PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 13 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

Control and monitoring Control matrix

functions

The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and signal
lamps to information produced by the protection units, program logic and logic inputs.
E65575

Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected.

The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the
SFT2841 software tool.

SFT2841: control matrix.

Data Meaning Comments

All of the application protection functions Protection time-delayed output and additional
outputs when applicable
79 - cleared fault The recloser function has sucessfully reclosed Impulse type output
79 - permanent fault The circuit breaker is definitively open after the Impulse type output
reclosing cycles
Logic inputs I11 to I14 and I21 to I26
BI transmission
According to configuration
Sending of the blocking information to the
following Sepam in logic discrimination chain
If MES114 module is configured
O3 by default 4
TCS Trip circuit fault or mismatching of CB position If the circuit breaker / contactor control
contacts function is activated
CB control fault A circuit breaker open or close order has not
been executed
Sensor fault Hardware problem on an MET module or on an
RTD
Pick-up Logical OR of the instantaneous output of all
protection units
Watchdog Monitoring of Sepam operation Always on O4 if used

4/13
 PCRED301005EN_4-Control_2004.FM Page 14 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 2:47 14

4/14
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004TDM.fm Page 1 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Presentation

Presentation 5/2
Modbus protocol 5/3
Implementation 5/4
Data addresses and encoding 5/6
Time-tagging of events 5/15
Access to remote settings 5/20
Disturbance recording 5/29
Reading Sepam identification 5/31

5/1
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 2 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Presentation

General
Modbus communication enables Sepam to be connected to a remote monitoring
and control system equipped with a master Modbus communication channel and a
physical link of the RS 485 type, optical fibre or another interface equipped with an
appropriate converter.
The Modbus protocol used by Sepam is a compatible sub-group of the RTU
Modbus (1) protocol (a Modbus master can communicate with several Sepam units).
Sepam is always a slave station.
All the Sepam units can be equipped with the ACE949-2 (2-wire) or ACE959 (4-wire)
interface for connection to a communication network, RS 485 and ACE937 for
connection to a communication network, fiber optics in star arrangement.

Data available
The data available depend on the type of Sepam.
Measurement readout
b phase and earth fault currents
b peak demand phase currents
b tripping currents
b cumulative breaking current
b phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral and residual voltages
b frequency
b temperatures
b thermal capacity used
b starts per hour and inhibit time
b running hours counter
b motor starting current and time
b operating time before overload tripping
b waiting time after tripping
b operating time and number of operations
b circuit breaker charging time.
5 Program logic data readout
b a table of 64 pre-assigned remote indications (TS) (depends on the type of
Sepam) enables the readout of program logic data status
b readout of the status of 10 logic inputs.
Remote control orders
Writing of 16 impulse-type remote control orders (TC) in either direct mode or SBO
(Select Before Operate) mode via 16 selection bits.
Other functions
b reading of Sepam configuration and identification
b time-tagging of events (synchronization via the network or externally via logic input
I21), time-tagging within a ms
b remote reading of Sepam settings
b remote setting of protection units
b remote control of the analog output (with MSA141 option)
b transfer of disturbance recording data.

(1) Modbus is a Modicon registered trademark.

5/2
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 3 Lundi, 26. juillet 2004 11:35 11

Modbus communication Modbus protocol

Characterization of exchanges master

MT10203
The Modbus protocol may be used to read or write one
or more bits, one or more words, the contents of the
event counters or the contents of the diagnosis
counters. request

Modbus functions supported

The Modbus protocol used by Sepam is a compatible
sub-group of the RTU Modbus protocol. reply
The functions listed below are handled by Sepam:
b basic functions (data access):
v function 1: reading of n output or internal bits
v function 2: reading of n input bits MERLIN GERIN MERLIN GERIN MERLIN GERIN

v function 3: reading of n output or internal words slave slave slave

v function 4: reading of n input words
Exchanges are initiated by the master and include a request by the master and a
v function 5: writing of 1 bit
reply by the slave (Sepam). Requests by the master are either addressed to a given
v function 6: writing of 1 word
Sepam identified by its number in the first byte of the request frame, or addressed to
v function 7: high-speed reading of 8 bits
all the Sepam (broadcasting).
v function 8: reading of diagnosis counters
v function 11: reading of Modbus event counters master
v function 15: writing of n bits
MT10204

v function 16: writing of n words.

b communication-management functions:
v function 8: Modbus diagnosis
v function 11: reading of Modbus event counter broadcasting
v function 43: sub-function 14: reading of identification.

The following exception codes are supported:

b 1: unknown function code
b 2: incorrect address
b 3: incorrect data
b 4: not ready (cannot process request)
b 7: not acknowledged (remote reading and setting).
slave
MERLIN GERIN

slave
MERLIN GERIN

slave
MERLIN GERIN 5
Broadcast commands are necessarily write commands.
No replies are transmitted by the Sepam.
MT10524

request

reply MERLIN GERIN

master slave

It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of the protocol unless the master is
a central computer which requires the corresponding programming. All Modbus
exchanges include 2 messages: a request by the master and a reply by the Sepam.
All the frames that are exchanged have the same structure. Each message or frame
contains 4 types of data:
slave function data CRC 16
number code zones check zone

b slave number (1 byte): this indicates the receiving Sepam (0 to FFh).

If it is equal to zero, the request concerns all the slaves (broadcasting) and there is
no reply message
b function code (1 byte): this is used to select a command (read, write, bit, word) and
to check that the reply is correct
b data zones (n bytes): these zones contain the parameters relating to the function:
bit, address, word address, bit value, word value, number of bits, number of words
b check zone (2 bytes): this zone is used to detect transmission errors.
Synchronization of exchanges
Any character that is received after a silence of more than 3 characters is considered
as the beginning of a frame. A silence of at least 3 characters must be left on the line
between two frames.
Example: at 9600 bauds, this time is equal to approximately 3 milliseconds.

5/3
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 4 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Implementation

Communication interface characteristics

Type of transmission Asynchronous serial
Protocol Modbus slave (Jbus profile)
Rate 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 bauds.
Data format 1 start, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop
1 start, 8 bits, even parity, 1 stop
1 start, 8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop
Response time Less than 15 ms
Maximum number of Sepams on a 25
Modbus network
RS 485 electrical interface ACE949-2, compliant with EIA standard
2-wire differential RS 485
ACE959, compliant with EIA standard
4-wire differential RS 485
Electrical interface power supply External, by auxiliary supply
12 V DC or 24 V DC
Type of connection Screw-type terminals and clamps for
recovery of shielding
Maximum length of RS 485 network With interfaces with 12 V dc distributed
supply
(lengths multiplied by 3 with FILECA 320 m with 5 Sepam
cable, with a maximum of 1300 m) 180 m with 10 Sepam
160 m with 20 Sepam
125 m with 25 Sepam
With interfaces with 24 V DC distributed
supply
1000 m with 5 Sepam
750 m with 10 Sepam
450 m with 20 Sepam
375 m with 25 Sepam

5 question broadcasting question

Fiber optics interface, refer to the chapter "connection of ACE937 interfaces", page 6/27

Response time
DE50378

reply
The communication coupler response time (Tr) is less than 15 ms, including a
3-character silence (approximately 3 ms at 9600 bauds).
Tr y 15 ms Tr y 15 ms This time is given with the following parameters:
b 9600 bauds
b format: 8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit.

Setting the communication parameters

Before a Sepam equipped with the Modbus communication system is put into
service, 4 parameters need to be set. Those parameters are saved in the event of a
power outage.

Communication parameters Factory setting

Transmission rate, 9600 bauds
adjustable from 4800 to 38400 bauds
Slave number assigned to Sepam N° 001
adjustable from 1 to 255
Parity: even parity, odd parity, no parity Even parity
Direct / confirmed remote control mode Direct

The Modbus slave number should be assigned before Sepam is connected to the
communication network (all Sepams have a slave number that is factory-set to 1).
Set the communication parameters before connecting Sepam to the communication
network.
The communication parameters may be changed while Sepam is operating without
disturbing operation. Sepam ignores the first frame received after it is energized or
after the communication parameters are changed via SFT2841.
Activity LED
The LED on the ACE949-2 or ACE959 accessory is activated by variations of the
electrical signal on the RS 485 network, the LED on the ACE937 accessory is
activated by variations of the optical signals. When the master communicates with
Sepam (sending or receiving), the LED flashes.

5/4
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 5 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Implementation

Testing the link

b after wiring, check the indications given by the activity LED
b carry out read and write cycles using the test zone and the Modbus echo mode
b use the SFT2819 software to read and write the test zone.

Test zone The Modbus frames opposite, sent by or received by a remote monitoring and control
Read system, are data used for test purposes when the communication link is first
Send 01 03 0C00 0002 (C75B) crc, implemented.
Receive 01 03 04 0000 0000 (FA33) crc.
The CRC received by Sepam is recalculated, making it possible to test the
calculation of the CRC sent by the master:
Write
b if the CRC received is correct, Sepam replies
Send 01 10 0C00 0001 02 1234 (6727) crc, b if the CRC received is incorrect, Sepam does not reply.
Receive 01 10 0C00 0001 (0299) crc.
Read
Send 01 03 0C00 0001 (875A) crc,
Receive 01 03 02 1234 (B533) crc.
Modbus echo mode (see Modbus protocol function 8)
Send 01 08 0000 1234 (ED7C) crc,
Receive 01 08 0000 1234 (ED7C) crc.

Diagnosis counters
The diagnosis counters managed by Sepam are:
b CPT1, first word: number of correct frames received, whether or not the slave is
concerned
b CPT2, second word: number of frames received with CRC error, or frames
received with more than 255 bytes and not interpreted, or frames received with at
least one character that has a parity error, “overrun”, “framing”, “break” on the line.
An incorrect rate causes incrementation of CPT2
b CPT3, third word: number of exception replies generated (even if not sent, as a
result of a broadcast request)
b CPT4, fourth word: number of frames specifically addressed to the station
(excluding broadcasting) 5
b CPT5, fifth word: number of broadcast frames received with no errors
b CPT6, sixth word: not significant
b CPT7, seventh word: number of “Sepam not ready” replies generated
b CPT8, eighth word: number of frames received with at least one character that has
a parity error, “overrun”, “framing”, “break” on the line
b CPT9, ninth word: number of correct requests received and correctly executed.
The CPT2 and CPT9 counters may be viewed with SFT2841 (“Sepam diagnosis"
screen).
The counters may be accessed via the dedicated reading function (Modbus protocol
function 11).
When the value of a counter is equal to FFFFh (65535), it automatically switches to
0000h (0). After an auxiliary supply outage the diagnosis counters are initialized to
zero.

Malfunctions
b it is advisable to connect the Sepam to the RS 485 network one by one
b the display of the CPT2 and CPT9 diagnosis counters with SFT2841 ("Sepam
diagnosis" screen) makes it possible to check Modbus exchanges
b check the slave number, rate and format using SFT2841 of the Sepam UMI.
Make sure that the master is sending frames to the Sepam concerned by checking
the activity on the RS 232 - RS 485 converter, if there is one, and on the ACE949-2
or ACE959 module.
b check the wiring on each ACE949-2 or ACE959 module
b check the tightening of the screw-type terminals on each module
b check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE949-2 or ACE959
module to the Sepam unit (marked ©)
b check that polarization is only at one point and that impedance matching is at the
ends of the RS 485 network
b check that the cable being used is the recommended one
b check that the ACE909-2 or ACE919 converter is connected and set up correctly.

5/5
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 6 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Presentation
Data which are similar from the monitoring and control application viewpoint are
grouped together in adjacent address zones:

Hexadecimal Ending Modbus functions

starting address enabled
address
Synchronization zone 0002 0005 3, 16
Identification zone 0006 000F 3
First event table
Exchange word 0040 0040 3, 6, 16
Events (1 to 4) 0041 0060 3
Second event table
Exchange word 0070 0070 3, 6, 16
Events (1 to 4) 0071 0090 3
Data
States 0100 0105 3, 4
1, 2*
Measurements 0106 0131 3, 4
Remote control orders 01F0 01F0 3, 4, 6, 16
1, 2, 5, 15*
Remote control confirmation 01F1 01F1 3, 4, 6, 16
1, 2, 5, 15*
Test zone 0C00 0C0F 3, 4, 6, 16
1, 2, 5, 15
Protection settings
Reading 2000 207C 3
Reading request 2080 2080 3, 6, 16
Remote settings 2100 217C 3, 6
Disturbance recording

5 Choice of transfer function

Identification zone
Fault rec. exchange word
2200
2204
2300
2203
2228
2300
3, 16
3
3, 6, 16
Fault rec. data 2301 237C 3
Application
Configuration FC00 FC02 3
Application identification FC10 FC22 3
N.B. Non-addressable zones may reply by an exception message or else supply
non-significant data.
(*) these zones may be accessed in word mode or in bit mode.
The address of bit i (0 y i y F) of address word J is then (J x 16) + i.
e.g. 0C00 bit 0 = C000 0C00 bit 7 = C007.

5/6
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 7 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Synchronization zone
The synchronization zone is a table which contains the absolute date and time for
the time-tagging function. Time messages should be written in a single block
containing 4 words, using function 16: write word.
Messages can be read word by word or by groups of words using function 3.

Synchronization zone Word address Access Modbus function

enabled
Binary time (year) 0002 Read/write 3, 16
Binary time (months + days) 0003 Read 3
Binary time (hours + minutes) 0004 Read 3
Binary time (milliseconds) 0005 Read 3
See "time-tagging of events" chapter for data format.

Identification zone
The identification zone contains system-type information pertaining to the
identification of the Sepam equipment.
Some of the information in the identification zone is also found in the configuration
zone at the address FC00h.

Identification zone Word address Access Modbus function Format Value

enabled
Manufacturer identification 0006 R 3 0100
Equipment 0007 R 3 0
Marking + equipment type 0008 R 3 Idem FC01
Modbus version 0009 R 3 Idem FC02
Application version 000A/B R 3 Not managed 0
Sepam check-word 000C R 3 Idem 0100
Synthesis zone 000D R 3 Not managed 0
Command
Extension address
000E
000F
R/W
R
3/16
3
Not managed Init. to 0
FC00
This zone is provided to ensure compatibility with existing equipment. A more complete description is available starting at address FC00h in the configuration zone
5
or using the identification read function.

First events zone

The events zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time-tagged events.
Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3.
The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16, and read individually using
function 3.

Events zone 1 Word address Access Modbus function

enabled
Exchange word 0040 Read/write 3, 6, 16
Event n°1 0041-0048 Read 3
Event n°2 0049-0050 Read 3
Event n°3 0051-0058 Read 3
Event n°4 0059-0060 Read 3
See "time-tagging of events" chapter for data format.

Second events zone

The events zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time-tagged events.
Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3.
The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using
function 3.

Events zone 2 Word address Access Modbus function

enabled
Exchange word 0070 Read/write 3, 6, 16
Event n°1 0071-0078 Read 3
Event n°2 0079-0080 Read 3
Event n°3 0081-0088 Read 3
Event n°4 0089-0090 Read 3
See "time-tagging of events" chapter for data format.

5/7
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 8 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Status zone
The status zone is a table which contains the Sepam check-word, pre-assigned
remote annunciation bits (TS), and logical inputs.

Status Word address Bit address Access Modbus function Format

enabled
Sepam check-word 100 1000 R 3/4 or 1, 2, 7 X
TS1-TS16 101 1010 R 3/4 or 1, 2 B
TS17-TS32 102 1020 R 3/4 or 1, 2 B
TS33-TS48 103 1030 R 3/4 or 1, 2 B
TS49-TS64 104 1040 R 3/4 or 1, 2 B
Logical inputs 105 1050 R 3/4 or 1, 2 B

Measurement zone (S20, T20, M20 types)

Measurements Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit
enabled
I1 phase current (gain x 1) 106 R 3/4 16NS 0.1 A
I2 phase current (gain x 1) 107 R 3/4 16NS 0.1 A
I3 phase current (gain x 1) 108 R 3/4 16NS 0.1 A
I0 residual current (gain x 1) 109 R 3/4 16NS 0.1 A
Im1 average phase current (x 1) 10A R 3/4 16NS 0.1 A
Im2 average phase current (x 1) 10B R 3/4 16NS 0.1 A
Im3 average phase current (x 1) 10C R 3/4 16NS 0.1 A
I1 phase current (gain x 10) 10D R 3/4 16NS 1A
I2 phase current (gain x 10) 10E R 3/4 16NS 1A
I3 phase current (gain x 10) 10F R 3/4 16NS 1A
I0 residual current (gain x 10) 110F R 3/4 16NS 1A
IM1 average phase current (x10) 111 R 3/4 16NS 1A

5 IM2 average phase current (x10)

IM3 average phase current (x10)
112
113
R
R
3/4
3/4
16NS
16NS
1A
1A
IM1 peak demand phase current 114 R 3/4 16NS 1A
IM2 peak demand phase current 115 R 3/4 16NS 1A
IM3 peak demand phase current 116 R 3/4 16NS 1A
Reserved 117 R 3/4 - -
Itrip1 tripping current 118 R 3/4 16NS 10 A
Itrip2 tripping current 119 R 3/4 16NS 10 A
Itrip3 tripping current 11A R 3/4 16NS 10 A
Itrip0 tripping current 11B R 3/4 16NS 1A
Cumulative breaking current 11C R 3/4 16NS 1 (kA)2
Number of operations 11D R 3/4 16NS 1
Operating time 11E R 3/4 16NS 1 ms
Charging time 11F R 3/4 16NS 1 sec
Reserved 120 R 3/4 - -
Running hours counter 121 R 3/4 16NS 1h
Thermal capacity used 122 R 3/4 16NS %
Operating time before overload tripping 123 R 3/4 16NS 1 min
Waiting time after overload tripping 124 R 3/4 16NS 1 min
Unbalance ratio 125 R 3/4 16NS % Ib
Starting time / overload 126 R 3/4 16NS 0.1 sec
Starting current overload 127 R 3/4 16NS 1A
Start inhibit time delay 128 R 3/4 16NS 1 min
Number of starts allowed 129 R 3/4 16NS 1
Temperatures 1 to 8 12A/131 R 3/4 16S 1 °C
Reserved 132/1EF Prohibited
Note: Only the measurements related to the Sepam function are significant. The values of the others are zero.

5/8
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 9 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Measurement zone (B20, B21, B22 types)

Measurements Word address Access Modbus function Format Unit
enabled
U21 phase to phase voltage (x1) 106 R 3/4 16NS 1V
U32 phase to phase voltage (x1) 107 R 3/4 16NS 1V
U13 phase to phase voltage (x1) 108 R 3/4 16NS 1V
V1 phase to neutral voltage (x1) 109 R 3/4 16NS 1V
V2 phase to neutral voltage (x1) 10A R 3/4 16NS 1V
V3 phase to neutral voltage (x1) 10B R 3/4 16NS 1V
V0 residual voltage (x1) 10C R 3/4 16NS 1V
Positive sequence voltage (x1) 10D R 3/4 16NS 1V
Frequency 10E R 3/4 16NS 0.01 Hz
U21 phase to phase voltage (x10) 10F R 3/4 16NS 1V
U32 phase to phase voltage (x10) 110 R 3/4 16NS 1V
U13 phase to phase voltage (x10) 111 R 3/4 16NS 1V
V1 phase to neutral voltage (x10) 112 R 3/4 16NS 1V
V2 phase to neutral voltage (x10) 113 R 3/4 16NS 1V
V3 phase to neutral voltage (x10) 114 R 3/4 16NS 1V
V0 residual voltage (x10) 115 R 3/4 16NS 1V
Positive sequence voltage (x10) 116 R 3/4 16NS 1V
Reserved 117/131 R 3/4 init. to 0
Reserved 132/1EF Prohibited

Accuracy Examples
The accuracy of the measurements depends on the I1 Unit = 1 A Accuracy = 1/2 = 0.5 A
order of the unit: it is equal to the value of the point U21 Unit = 10 V Accuracy = 1/2 = 0.5 A
divided by 2.

Remote control zone

The remote control zone is a table which contains the pre-assigned remote control
5
bits (TC). The zone may be read or written using the word functions or bit functions.
See section on remote control orders.

Remote control bits Word address Bit address Access Modbus function Format
enabled
TC1-TC16 01F0 1F00 R/W 3/4/6/16 B
1/2/5/15
3/4/6/16
STC1-STC16 01F1 1F10 R/W 1/2/5/15 B
Analog output control 01F2 R/W 3/4/6/16 16S

Protection setting zone

The protection setting zone is an exchange table which is used to read and set
protections.

Protection settings Word address Access Modbus function

enabled
Setting read buffer 2000/207C R 3
Setting read request 2080 R/W 3/6/16 -
Remote setting request buffer 2100/217C R/W 3/16
See section on protection settings.

5/9
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 10 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Fault recorder zone

The fault recorder zone is an exchange table which is used to read records.

Disturbance recording Word address Access Modbus function

enabled
Choice of transfer function 2200/2203 R/W 3/16
Identification zone 2204/2228 R 3
Fault rec. exchange word 2300 R/W 3/6/16
Fault rec. data 2301/237C R 3
See section on fault recorder.

Test zone
The test zone is a 16-word zone that may be accessed via the communication link
by all the functions, in both read and write modes, to facilitate communication testing
at the time of commissioning or to test the link.

Test zone Word address Bit address Access Modbus function Format
enabled
Test 0C00 C000-C00F read/write 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, 16 none init. to 0
0C0F C0F0-C0FF read/write 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, 16 none init. to 0

Configuration zone
The configuration zone contains information pertaining to the hardware and
software configuration of the Sepam.

Configuration zone Word address Access Modbus function Format

enabled
Modbus address FC00 R 3
(slave no.)
Sepam type (MSB) / FC01 R 3 (1)

5 hardware config. (LSB)

Coupler type (MSB)/
version (LSB)
FC02 R 3 (2)

application identification
Type of application FC10/15 R 3 ASCII 12 characters
(S20, M20, etc.)
application version FC16/18 R 3 ASCII 6 characters
application marking FC19/22 R 3 ASCII 20 characters
(1) FC01 word:MSB = 10h (Sepam )
LSB = hardware configuration
(2) FC02 word:MSB = 01h (Sepam )
LSB = XY (communicationversion X,Y)

Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Option UD/UX reserved MES114E/ DSM303 MSA141 MET148-2 (3) MES114 MES108
MES114F
UX model 0 0 z x x x y y
UX model 1 0 z 0 x x y y
(3) or MET148.
x = 1 if option included
y = 1 if option included, exlusive options
z = 1 if Vac set up.

5/10
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 11 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Data encoding
For all formats
If a measurement overruns the maximum permissible value for the related format, the
value read for the measurement will be the maximum permissible value for the
format.
Format16 NS
All information is encoded in a 16-bit word, in absolute value (unsigned), binary
format. The zero bit (b0) is the least significant bit in the word.
Format 16 S signed measurements (temperatures, …)
The information is encoded in a 16-bit word as a complement of 2.
Example:
b 0001 represents +1
b FFFF represents -1.
Format B: Ix
Rank i bit in the word, with i between 0 and F.

Examples F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Logical Word address 0105
input 26 25 24 23 22 21 14 13 12 11
Bit address 105x
TS Word address 0101
1 to 16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Bit address 101x
TS Word address 0104
49 to 64 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Bit address 104x
TC Word address 01F0
1 to 16 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Bit address 1F0x
STC Word address 01F1
1 to 16
Bit address 1F1x
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5
Format X: Sepam check-word
This format applies only to the Sepam check-word that may be accessed at the word
address 100h. This word contains various items of information relating to:
b Sepam operating mode
b time-tagging of events.
Each data item contained in the Sepam check-word may be accessed bit by bit, from
address 1000 for the bit b0 to 100F for the bit b15.
b bit 15 event present
b bit 14 Sepam in “data loss” status
b bit 13 Sepam not synchronous
b bit 12 Sepam time not correct
b bit 11 reserved
b bit 10 Sepam in local setting mode
b bit 9 major fault in Sepam
b bit 8 partial fault in Sepam
b bit 7 setting group A in service
b bit 6 setting group B in service
b bit 3-0 mapping number (1 to 16).
Other bits reserved (undetermined values).
Status changes of bits 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13 and 14 of this word trigger the transmission
of a time-tagged event.
Bits 3 to 0 encode a “mapping number” (from 1 to 15) which is used to identify the
contents of the Modbus addresses, the assignment of which varies depending on the
application.

5/11
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 12 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Use of remote annunciation

Sepam provides the communication link with 64 remote annunciation bits (TS).
The TS are pre-assigned to protection and control functions which depend on the
Sepam model.
The TS can be read using the bit or word functions.
Each TS transition is time-tagged and stored in the event stack (see section on time-
tagging).

TS Use S20 T20 M20 B21 B22

1 Protection 50/51 relay 1 group A b b b
2 Protection 50/51 relay 2 group A b b b
3 Protection 50/51 relay 1 group B b b b
4 Protection 50/51 relay 2 group B b b b
5 Protection 50N/51N relay 1 group A b b b
6 Protection 50N/51N relay 2 group A b b b
7 Protection 50N/51N relay 1 group B b b b
8 Protection 50N/51N relay 2 group B b b b
9 Protection 49 RMS alarm set point b b
10 Protection 49 RMS trip set point b b
11 Protection 37 (undercurrent) b
12 Protection 46 (neg. seq/unbalance) b b b
13 Protection 48/51LR/14 (locked rotor) b
14 Protection 48/51LR/14 (rotor locking on start) b
15 Protection 48/51LR/14 (excessive starting time) b
16 Protection 66 (starts per hour) b

Address word 102: TS 17 to 32 (bit address 1020 to 102F)

5 TS Use
17 Protection 27D (dir. undervoltage) relay 1
S20 T20 M20 B21
b
B22
b
18 Protection 27D (dir. undervoltage) relay 2 b b
19 Protection 27 (ph.-to-ph. undervoltage) relay 1 b b
20 Protection 27 (ph.-to-ph. undervoltage) relay 2 b b
21 Protection 27R (remanent U/V) relay 1 b b
22 Protection 59 (ph.-to-ph. overvoltage) relay 1 b b
23 Protection 59 (ph.-to-ph. overvoltage) relay 2 b b
24 Protection 59N (ph.-to-n. overvoltage) relay 1 b b
25 Protection 59N (ph.-to-n. overvoltage) relay 2 b b
26 Protection 81H (overfrequency) b b
27 Protection 81L (underfrequency) relay 1 b b
28 Protection 81L (underfrequency) relay 2 b b
29 Protection 27S (undervoltage) phase 1 b b
30 Protection 27S (undervoltage) phase 2 b b
31 Protection 27S (undervoltage) phase 3 b b
32 Protection 81R (rate of change of frequency) b

5/12
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 13 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Address word 103: TS 33 to 48 (bit address 1030 to 103F)

TS Use S20 T20 M20 B21 B22

33 Reserved
34 Recloser in service b
35 Recloser in progress b
36 Recloser permanent trip b
37 Recloser successful trip b
38 Send blocking input b b b
39 Remote setting inhibited b b b b b
40 Remote control inhibited b b b b b
41 Sepam not reset after fault b b b b b
42 Remote control / position discrepancy b b b b b
43 Matching fault or Trip Circuit Supervision b b b b b
44 Disturbance recording memorized b b b b b
45 Control fault b b b b b
46 Disturbance recording inhibited b b b b b
47 Thermal protection inhibited b b
48 RTD fault b b

Address word 104: TS 49 to 64 (bit address 1040 to 104F)

TS Use S20 T20 M20 B21 B22

49 Protection 49T alarm set point sensor 1 b b
50 Protection 49T tripping set point sensor 1 b b
51 Protection 49T alarm set point sensor 2 b b
52 Protection 49T tripping set point sensor 2 b b
53 Protection 49T alarm set point sensor 3 b b
54
55
Protection 49T tripping set point sensor 3
Protection 49T alarm set point sensor 4
b
b
b
b
5
56 Protection 49T tripping set point sensor 4 b b
57 Protection 49T alarm set point sensor 5 b b
58 Protection 49T tripping set point sensor 5 b b
59 Protection 49T alarm set point sensor 6 b b
60 Protection 49T tripping set point sensor 6 b b
61 Protection 49T alarm set point sensor 7 b b
62 Protection 49T tripping set point sensor 7 b b
63 Protection 49T alarm set point sensor 8 b b
64 Protection 49T tripping set point sensor 8 b b

5/13
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 14 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding

Use of remote control orders Address word 1F0: TC 1 to 16 (address bit 1F00 to 1F0F)
Remote control orders are pre-assigned to protection, TC Use S20 T20 M20 B21 B22
control and metering functions. 1 Tripping b b b b b
Remote control orders may be carried out in two 2 Closing b b b b b
modes: 3 Swtiching to setting group A b b b
b direct mode
4 Switching to setting group B b b b
b confirmed SBO (select before operate) mode.
5 Sepam reset (reset) b b b b b
All the remote control orders may be inhibited by a
logical input, I25 on the MES114 module, except for the 6 Peak demand current zero reset b b b b b
remote control tripping order TC1 which can still be 7 Inhibit thermal protection b b
activated at any time. 8 Inhibit disturbance recording triggering b b b b b
Logical input I25 may be set up according to 2 modes: 9 Confirm disturbance recording triggering b b b b b
b inhibited if the input is set to 1 (“POS“ prefix) 10 Manual disturbance recording triggering b b b b b
b inhibited if the input is set to 0 (“NEG“ prefix). 11 Enable recloser b
The device tripping and closing and recloser enable 12 Disable recloser b
and disable remote control orders are acknowledged if 13 Confirm thermal protection b b
the “CB control“ function is validated and if the inputs 14 Reserved
necessary for the logic are present (1). 15 Reserved
16 Reserved
Direct remote control order
The remote control order is executed when it is written
in the remote control word. The program logic resets it Analog output remote control
to zero after the remote control order is acknowledged. The analog output of the MSA141 module may be set up for remote control via the
Modbus communication module (word address 1F2). The working range of the
Confirmed SBO remote numerical value transmitted is defined by the parameter setting of the "min. value"
control order (select before operate) and "max. value" of the analog output.
In this mode, remote control orders involve two steps: This function is not affected by remote control inhibition conditions.
b selection by the master of the order to be sent by
writing of the bit in the STC word and checking of the
selection by rereading the word
b execution of the order to be sent by writing of the bit

5 in the TC word.
The remote control order is executed if the bit in the
STC word and the bit in the associated word are set;
the program logic resets the bit STC and TC bits to zero
after the remote control order is acknowledged.
Deselection of the STC bit takes place:
b if the master deselects it by writing in the STC word
b if the master selects (write bit) a bit other than the
one already selected
b if the master sets a bit in the TC word which does not
match the selection. In this case, no remote control
order is executed.

(1) MES108 or MES114 modules.

5/14
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 15 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Time-tagging of events

Presentation Initialization of the time-tagging function

The communication system time-tags the data Each time the communication system is initialized (energizing of Sepam), the events
prcessed by Sepam. The time-tagging function assigns are generated in the following order:
a date and precise time to status changes so that they b appearance of "data loss"
can be accurately classified with over time. Time- b appearance of "incorrect time"
tagged data are events that can be processed in the b appearance of "not synchronous"
control room by the remote monitoring and control b disappearance of "data loss".
system using the communication protocol for data The function is initialized with the current values of the remote annunciation and
logging and chronological reports. logical input status without creating any events related to these data. After the
Sepam time-tags the following data: initialization phase, event detection is activated.
b logical inputs It can only be interrupted by saturation of the internal event storage queue or by the
b remote annunciation bits presence of a major fault in Sepam.
b information pertaining to Sepam equipment (see
Sepam check-word). Date and time
Time-tagging is carried out systematically. An absolute date and time are generated internally by Sepam, comprising the following
Chronological sorting of the time-tagged events is information: Year: Month: Day: Hour: minute: millisecond. The date and time format
performed by the remote monitoring and control is standardized (ref.: IEC870-5-4).
system. Sepam's internal clock is not saved; it needs to be time-set via the communication
Time-tagging network each time the Sepam is energized.
Sepam time-tagging uses absolute time (see section Sepam series 20's internal clock may be set in two different ways:
on date and time). When an event is detected, it is b by the remote monitoring and control system, via the Modbus link
tagged with the absolute time given by Sepam’s b via the SFT2841 software, "general characteristics" screen.
internal clock.
All the Sepam internal clocks must be synchronized so The time that is tagged on events is encoded in 8 bytes as follows:
as to avoid drifts and all be the same to allow inter- b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08 b07 b06 b05 b04 b03 b02 b01 b00 word
Sepam chronological sorting. Sepam has two 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y word 1
mechanisms for managing its internal clock: 0 0 0 0 M M M M 0 0 0 D D D D D word 2
b time-setting:
0 0 0 H H H H H 0 0 mn mn mn mn mn mn word 3
for initializing or modifying the absolute time. A special
ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms word 4
Modbus message, called “time message”, is used to
time-set each Sepam
b synchronization:
to avoid Sepam internal clock drifts and ensure inter-
Sepam synchronization.
Y - 1 byte for years: varies from 0 to 99 years.
The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is greater
than 99.
5
Internal clocks can be synchronized according to two M - 1 byte for months: varies from 1 to 12.
principles: D - 1 byte for days: varies from 1 to 31.
b internal synchronization: H - 1 byte for hours: varies from 0 to 23.
via the communication network without any additional mn - 1 byte for minutes: varies from 0 to 59.
cabling, ms - 2 bytes for milliseconds: varies from 0 to 59999.
b external synchronization: This information is encoded in binary form. Sepam is time-set via the “write word”
via a logical input with additional cabling. function (function 16) at the address 0002 with a mandatory 4-word time message.
At the time of commissioning, the user sets the The bits set to “0” in the description above correspond to format fields which are not
synchronization mode parameter. used and not generated by Sepam.
Since these bits can be transmitted to Sepam with random values, Sepam performs
the necessary disabling.
Sepam does not check the consistency or validity of the date and time received.

Synchronization clock
A synchronization clock is required for setting the date and time of Sepam.
Schneider Electric has tested the equipment sold by the following suppliers:
b Gorgy Timing, ref. RT 300, equipped with the M540 module
b SCLE, ref. RH 2000-B.

5/15
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 16 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Time-tagging of events

Reading of events Exchange word

Sepam provides the master or masters with two event The exchange word is used to manage a special protocol to be sure not to lose
tables. The master reads the event table and events following a communication problem. The event table is numbered for this
acknowledges by writing the exchange word. purpose.
Sepam updates its event table. The exchange word includes two fields:
b most significant byte = exchange number (8 bits): 0..255
The events sent by Sepam are not sorted
chronologically. b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08

Structure of the first event table:

b exchange word 0040h
Exchange number: 0 .. 255
b event number 1
0041h ... 0048h
b event number 2 Description of the MS byte of the exchange word.
0049h ... 0050h
b event number 3 The exchange number contains a numbering byte which identifies the exchanges.
0051h ... 0058h The exchange number is initialized to zero when Sepam is energized.
b event number 4 When it reaches its maximum value (FFh), it automatically returns to 0.
0059h ... 0060h Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master acknowledges the numbering.

Structure of the second event table: b least significant byte = number of events (8 bits): 0..4
b exchange word 0070h
b event number 1 b07 b06 b05 b04 b03 b02 b01 b00
0071h ... 0078h
b event number 2
0079h ... 0080h
b event number 3 Number of events: 0 .. 4
0081h ... 0088h
b event number 4 Description of LS byte of the exchange word.
0089h ... 0090h
The master necessarily reads a block of 33 words
Sepam indicates the number of significant events in the event table in the least
5 starting at the address 0040h/0070h, or one word at
the address 0040h/0070h.
significant byte of the exchange word. Each non-significant event word is initialized
to zero.
Event table acknowledgment
To inform Sepam that the block read by the master has been correctly received, the
master writes the number of the last exchange made in the “Exchange number” field,
and resets the "Number of events" field of the exchange word to zero. After
acknowledgment, the 4 events in the event table are initialized to zero and the old,
acknowledged events are erased in Sepam.
Until the exchange word written by the master becomes “X,0” (with X = number of the
previous exchange that the master wishes to acknowledge), the exchange word in
the table remains at “X, number of previous events”.
Sepam only increments the exchange number when new events are present
(X+1, number of new events).
If the event table is empty, Sepam performs no processing operations when the
master reads the event table or the exchange word.
The data are encoded in binary form.
Sepam in data loss (1) / no data loss (0) status
Sepam has an internal storage queue with a capacity of 64 events. If the queue
becomes saturated, a "data loss" event is inserted by Sepam when each event table
is read.
The detection of events stops and the most recent events are lost.
Data loss is managed independently for each of the two event tables. When the
tables are read at different rates, data loss may occur at different times for each table
or even, in some cases, appear only on the slowest channel.
Note: the "data loss" bit of the Sepam check word corresponds to the status of the first reading
table (compatibility with earlier versions).

5/16
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 17 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Time-tagging of events

Description of event encoding

An event is encoded in 8 words with the following structure:

Most significant byte Least significant byte

Word 1: type of event
08 00 For remote annunciation, internal data
logical inputs
Word 2: event address
Refer to bit addresses 1000 to 105F
Word 3: reserved
00 00
Word 4: falling edge: disappearance or rising edge: appearance
00 00 Falling edge
00 01 Rising edge
Word 5: year
00 0 to 99 (year)
Word 6: month-day
1 to 12 (month) 1 to 31 (day)
Word 7 : hours-minutes
0 to 23 (hours) 0 to 59 (minutes)
Word 8: milliseconds
0 to 59999

5/17
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 18 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Time-tagging of events

Synchronization
DE50337

Sepam accommodates two synchronization modes:

b "internal via the network" synchronization mode by the broadcasting of a "time
message" frame via the communication network. Slave number 0 is used for
broadcasting
b "external" synchronization mode via a logic input.
The synchronization mode is selected at the time of commissioning via SFT2841.

Internal synchronization via the network mode

The “time message" frame is used for both time-setting and synchronization of
Sepam. In this case, it must be sent regularly at brief intervals (between 10 and
60 seconds) in order for synchronous time to be obtained.
Sepam’s internal clock is reset each time a new time frame is received, and
synchronization is maintained if the reset amplitude is less than 100 milliseconds.
With internal synchronization via the network, accuracy is linked to the master and
its mastery of time frame transmission in the communication network.
Sepam is synchronized without delay at the end of the receipt of the frame.
Time changes are made by sending a frame to Sepam with the new date and time.
Sepam then switches into a transitional non-synchronous status.
When Sepam is in synchronous status, if no "time message” is received
for 200 seconds, the appearance of the “not synchronous” event is triggered.

Architecture for "internal synchronization" via the

communication network.

5/18
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 19 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Time-tagging of events

Synchronization (cont’d)
DE50338

External synchronization via a logic input mode

Sepam can be synchronized externally by means of a logic input (I21) (the MES114
module is required).
Synchronization is carried out on the rising edge of the logic input.
Sepam can adapt to all synchronization "logical time pulse" periods from
10 to 60 s, by 10 s steps.
The shorter the synchronization period, the more accurate time-tagging of status
changes is.
The first time frame is used to initialize Sepam with the absolute date and time (the
following frames are used for the detection of any time changes).
The synchronization "logical time pulse" is used to reset Sepam’s internal clock. In
the initialization phase, when Sepam is in "non-synchronous" mode, resetting is
allowed, within an amplitude of ±4 seconds.
In the initialization phase, the resetting process (switching of Sepam into
"synchronous" mode) is based on a measurement of the difference between
Sepam’s current time and the nearest ten second period. This measurement is taken
at the time of the receipt of the "logical time pulse" following the initialization time
frame. Resetting is allowed if the difference is less than or equal to 4 seconds, in
which case Sepam switches to "synchronous" mode.
As of that time (after the switching to "synchronous" mode), the resetting process is
based on the measurement of a difference (between Sepam’s current time and the
nearest ten second period at the time of the receipt of a "logical time pulse"), which
is adapted to match the "logical time pulse" period.
Architecture for "external synchronization" via a logic input.
The "logical time pulse" period is determined automatically by Sepam when it
is energized, based on the first two pulses received: the "logical time pulse"
must therefore be operational before Sepam is energized.
The synchronization function only operates after Sepam has been time-set, i.e.
after the disappearance of the "incorrect time" event.
Any time changes greater than ±4 seconds in amplitude are made by sending a new
time frame. The switch from summer time to winter time (and vice versa) is made in
this way as well.
There is a temporary loss of synchronism when the time is changed.
5
The external synchronization mode requires additional equipment, a
"synchronization clock " to generate a precise periodic synchronization time pulse.
If Sepam is in "correct time and synchronous" status, and if the difference in
synchronism between the nearest ten second period and the receipt of the
synchronization time pulse is greater than the synchronism error for 2 consecutive
synchronization time pulses, it switches into non-synchronous status and generates
the appearance of a "not synchronous" event.
Likewise, if Sepam is in "correct time and synchronous" status, the failure to receive
a synchronization time pulse for 200 seconds generates the appearance of a "not
synchronous" event.

5/19
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 20 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

Reading of remote settings (remote reading)

Settings accessible for remote reading
Reading of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely.
Exchange principle
Remote reading of settings takes place in two steps:
b first of all, the master indicates the code of the function for which it wishes to know
the settings by means of a "request frame". The request is acknowledged, in the
Modbus sense of the term, to free the network
b the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a
"reply frame".
Each function has its own particular reply zone contents. The time needed between
the request and the reply is linked to Sepam’s low priority cycle time and may vary
by several tens to several hundreds of ms.
Request frame
The request is made by the master using a "write word" (code 6 or 16) operation at
the address 2080h of a 1-word frame consisting of the following:
2080h
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Function code Relay number

The content of the address 2080h may be read using a Modbus "read word" (code 3).
The function code field may have the following values:
b 01h to 99h (BCD encoding) for protection functions.
The relay number field is used as follows:
b for protection, it indicates the relay involved, varying from 1 to N, N being the
maximum number of relays available in the Sepam
b when only one relay is available, this number field is not controlled.
Exception replies
In addition to the usual cases, Sepam can send Modbus type 07 exception replies
(not acknowledged) if another remote reading request is being processed.
5 Reply frame
The reply, sent back by the Sepam, fits into a zone containing a maximum of 125
words at the address 2000h which is composed the following:
2000h/207Ch
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Function code Relay number
Settings
..............
(special field for each function)
..............

This zone is read by a "read word" operation (code 3) at the address 2000h.
The length of the exchange may include:
b the first word only (validity test)
b the maximum size of the zone (125 mots)
b the usable size of the zone (determined by the function being addressed).
However, reading must always begin at the first word in the zone (any other address
triggers an exception reply "incorrect address").
The first word in the zone (function code and relay number) may have the following
values:
xxyy: with
b function code xx different from 00 and FFh
b relay number yy different from FFh.
The settings are available and validated. They word is a copy of the "request frame".
The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made.
The other word are not significant.
b FFFFh: the "request frame" has been processed, but the results in the
"reply frame" are not yet available. It is necessary to repeat "reply frame" reading.
The other words are not significant.
b xxFFh: with function code xx different from 00 and FFh. The function for which the
remote reading request has been made is not valid. The function is not included in
the particular Sepam, or remote reading of it is not authorized: refer to the list of
functions which accommodate remote reading of settings.

5/20
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 21 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

Remote setting
Data that can be remotely set
Writing of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely.
Exchange principle
Remote setting is allowed for Sepam units.
Remote setting is carried out for a given function, relay by relay.
It takes place in two steps:
b first of all, the master indicates the function code and relay number, followed by the
values of all the settings in the a "write request frame". The request is acknowledged
to free the network
b the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a
"reply frame", a reply zone designed for checking that the settings have been
processed. Each function has its own particular reply zone contents. The contents
are same as those of the reply frame.
To use remote setting, it is necessary to make all the settings for the function
concerned, even if some of them have not changed.
Request frame
The request is made by the master using a "write n words" (code 16) operation at the
address 2100h. The zone to be written contains a maximum of 125 words.
It contains the values of all the settings. It consists of the following:
2100h
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Function code Relay number
Settings
..............
(special field for each function)
..............

The content of the address 2100h may be read using a "read n words" (code 3).
The function code field may have the following values:
b 01h to 99h (BCD encoding) for the list of protection functions F01 to F99.
The relay number field is used as follows:
5
b for protection, it indicates the relay involved, varying from 1 to N, N being the
maximum number of relays available in the Sepam. It may never be equal to 0.
Exception reply
In addition to the usual cases, Sepam can send type 07 exception replies
(not acknowledged) if:
b another remote reading or setting request is being processed
b the remote setting function is inhibited.

5/21
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 22 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

Reply frame
The reply sent back by the Sepam is the same as the remote reading reply frame. It
fits into a zone containing a maximum of 125 words at the address 2000h and is
composed of the effective settings of the function following a semantic check:
2000h-207Ch
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Function code Relay number
Settings
..............
(special field for each function)
..............

This zone is read by a "read n words" operation (code 3) at the address 2000h.
The length of the exchange may unclude:
b the first word only (validity test)
b the maximum size of the reply zone (125 words)
b the usable size of the reply zone (determined by the function being addressed).
However, reading must always begin at the first word in the address zone
(any other address triggers an exception reply "incorrect address").
The first word in the reply zone (function code and relay number) has the same
values as those described for the remote reading reply frame.
b xxyy: with:
v function code xx different from 00 and FFh
v relay number yy different from FFh.
The settings are available and validated. The word is a copy of the "request frame".
The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made.
b 0000h: no "request frame" has been formulated yet, as it is the case, in particular,
when the Sepam is switched on.
The other words are not significant.
b FFFFh: the "request frame" has been processed, but the results in the "reply
frame" are not yet available. It is necessary to repeat "reply frame" reading. The other
5 words are not significant.
b xxFFh: with function code xx different from 00 and FFh. The function for which the
remote reading request has been made is not valid. The function is not included in
that particular Sepam, or access to settings is impossible, both in read and write
mode.

5/22
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 23 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

Description of settings
Data format
All the settings are transmitted in signed 32-bit whole number form
(encoding, as a complement of 2).
Particular setting value:
7FFF FFFFh means that the setting is outside the validity range.
1 The Enabled or Disabled setting is encoded as follows:
0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
2 The tripping curve setting is encoded as follows:
0 = definite
1 = standard inverse time 9 = IEC VIT/
2 = long time inverse 10 = IEC EIT/C
3 = very inverse time 11 = IEEE Mod. inverse
4 = extremely inverse time 12 = IEEE Very inverse
5 = ultra inverse time 13 = IEEE Extr. inverse
6 = RI 14 = IAC inverse
7 = IEC SIT/A 15 = IAC very inverse
8 = IEC LTI/B 16 = IAC extr. inverse
3 The setting of the holding time curve is encoded as follows:
0 = definite time
1 = IDMT
4 The H2 restraint variable is encoded as follows:
0 = H2 restraint
1 = no H2 restraint
5 The tripping curve setting is:
0 = definite time
1 = IDMT
6 The negative sequence factor is:
0 = None (0)
1 = Low (2.25)
2 = Average (4.5)
3 = High (9)
5
7 Acknowledgment of the ambient temperature is encoded as follows:
0 = No
1 = Yes
8 Not used
9 The inhibition input setting is encoded as follows:
0 = No inhibition
1 = Inhibit recloser by logical input I26
10 Not used
11 The activation mode of each of the cycles is encoded as follows:
Correspondence between bit position and protection according to the table below:
Bit Activation by
0 Inst O/C 1
1 Time-delayed O/C 1
2 Inst O/C 2
3 Time-delayed O/C 2
4 Inst E/F 1
5 Time-delayed E/F 1
6 Inst E/F 2
7 Time-delayed E/F 2
The bit status is encoded as follows:
0 = No activation by the protection
1 = Activation by the protection.

5/23
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 24 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

General characteristics settings (read only)

Function number: 3002
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Rated frequency 0 = 50 Hz
1 = 60 Hz
2 Remote setting enabled 1 = disabled
3 Sepam working language 0 = English
1 = Customized language
4 Number of period before 1
disturbance recording
5 Active setting groupe 0 = Setting group A
1 = Setting group B
2 = setting group A and B
3 = Choice by input I13
4 = Choice by remote control
5 = Logic discrimination
6 Setting mode 0 = TMS
1 = 10I/Is
7 Type of phase current sensor 0 = TC 5 A
1 = TC 1 A
2 = LPTC
8 Number of CTs 0 = 3 TC (I1, I2, I3)
1 = 2 TC (I1, I3)
9 Rated current A
10 Base current A
11 Residual current mode 0 = 3I sum
1 = 2 A rated CSH
2 = 20 A rated CSH
3 = 1 A CT + CSH
4 = 5 A CT + CSH
5 = ACE990 Range 1
6 = ACE990 Range 2
12 Rated residual current Ino A
13 Integration period 0 = 5 mn
5 1 = 10 mn
2 = 15 mn
3 = 30 mn
4 = 60 mn
14 Reserved
15 Rated primary voltage Unp V
16 Rated secondary voltage Uns 0 = 100 V
1 = 110 V
2 = 115 V
3 = 120 V
4 = 200 V
5 = 230 V
17 Voltages mesured by VTs 0 = 3 V (V1, V2, V3)
1 = 2 U (U21, U32)
2 = 1 U (U21)
18 Residual voltage mode 0 = None
1 = 3 V sum
2 = external VT – Uns/3
3 = external VT – Uns/3

5/24
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 25 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

Protection settings
They are organized according to increasing ANSI codes.

ANSI 27 - Phase-to-phase undervoltage

Function number: 10xx
Relay 1: xx = 01
Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold voltage % Unp
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved

ANSI 27D/47 - Positive sequence undervoltage

Function number: 08xx
Relay 1: xx = 01
Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold voltage % Unp
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved

ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage

Function number: 0901
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold voltage % Unp
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved

ANSI 27S - Phase-to-neutral undervoltage

5
Function number: 1801
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold voltage % Vnp
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved

ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent

Function number: 0501
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold current % lb
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring

Function number: 15xx
Relay 1 : xx = 01
Relay 2 : xx = 02
Relay 3 : xx = 03
Relay 4 : xx = 04
Relay 5 : xx = 05
Relay-6 : xx = 06
Relay 7 : xx = 07
Relay 8 : xx = 08
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Alarm set point °C
3 Trip set point °C
4 to 8 Reserved

5/25
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 26 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance

Function number: 0301
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enable or disabled 1
2 Tripping curve 5
3 Threshold current % Ib
4 Tripping time delay 10 ms

ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Locked rotor, excessive starting time

Function number: 0601
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold current % Ib
3 Excessive starting time delayB (ST) 10 ms
4 Locked rotor time delay (LT) 10 ms
5 Locked rotor on start time delay (LTS) 10 ms

ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload

Function number: 0401
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enable or disabled 1
2 Negative sequence factor 6
3 Current threshold for switching from group A/group B % Ib
4 Accounting for ambient temperature 7
5 Maximum equipment temperature °C
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Group A - heatrise alarm set point %
9 Group A - heatrise tripping set point %

5 10
11
12
Group A - heating time constant
Group A - cooling time constant
Group A - initial heatrise value
minutes
minutes
%
13 Group B - enabled or disabled 1
14 Group B - heatrise alarm set point %
15 Group B - heatrise tripping set point %
16 Group B - heating time constant minutes
17 Group B - cooling time constant minutes
18 Group B - initial heatrise value %

ANSI 50/51 - Phase current

Function number: 01xx
Relay 1: xx = 01
Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Reserved
2 Group A - tripping curve 2
3 Group A - threshold current 0.1 A
4 Group A - tripping time delay 10 ms
5 Group A - holding time curve 3
6 Group A - holding time 10 ms
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 ON/OFF 1
10 Group B - tripping curve 2
11 Group B - threshold current 0.1 A
12 Group B - tripping time delay 10 ms
13 Group B - holding time 3
14 Group B - holding time 10 ms
15 Reserved
16 Reserved

5/26
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 27 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault

Function number: 02xx
Relay 1: xx = 01
Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Reserved
2 Group A - tripping curve 2
3 Group A - threshold current 0.1 A
4 Group A - tripping time delay 10 ms
5 Group A - holding time 3
6 Group A - holding time 10 ms
7 Group A - H2 restraint 4
8 Reserved
9 ON/OFF 1
10 Group B - tripping curve 2
11 Group B - threshold current 0.1 A
12 Group B - tripping time delay 10 ms
13 Group B - holding time 3
14 Group B - holding time 10 ms
15 Group B - H2 restraint 4
16 Reserved

ANSI 59 - Phase-to-phase overvoltage

Function number: 11xx
Relay 1: xx = 01
Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold voltage % Unp
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved 5
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
Function number: 12xx
Relay 1: xx = 01
Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold voltage % Unp
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved

ANSI 66 - Starts per hour

Function number: 0701
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Period of time hours
3 Total number of starts 1
4 Number of consecutive hot starts 1
5 Number of consecutive starts 1
6 Time delay between starts minutes

5/27
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 28 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Access to remote settings

ANSI 79 - Recloser function

Function number: 1701
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Recloser – enabled or disabled 1
2 Recloser inhibition by input I26 9
3 Number of cycles 1 to 4
4 Recloser – disengaging time delay 10 ms
5 Recloser – inhibition time delay 10 ms
6 Reserved
7 Cycle 1 – activation mode 11
8 Cycle 1 – isolation time delay 10 ms
9 Reserved
10 Cycle 2 – activation mode 11
11 Cycle 2 – isolation time delay 10 ms
12 Reserved
13 Cycle 3 – activation mode 11
14 Cycle 3 – isolation time delay 10 ms
15 Reserved
16 Cycle 4 – activation mode 11
17 Cycle 4 – isolation time delay 10 ms

ANSI 81H - Overfrequency

Function number: 1301
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold frequency 0.1 Hz
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved

ANSI 81L - Underfrequency

5 Function number: 14xx

Relay 1: xx = 01
Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Threshold voltage 0.1 Hz
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved

ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency

Function number: 1601
Setting Data Format/Unit
1 Enabled or disabled 1
2 Slip threshold 0.1 Hz/s
3 Tripping time delay 10 ms
4 to 8 Reserved

5/28
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 29 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Disturbance recording

Presentation Reading the identification zone

The disturbance recording function is used to record Given the volume of data to be transmitted, the master must ensure that there are
analog and logical signals during a time interval. data to be recovered and prepare the exchanges when necessary.
Sepam series 20 can store two records. The identification zone, described below, is read by the reading of N words starting
Each record comprises two files: at the address 2204h:
b configuration file with suffix .CFG b 2 reserve words forced to 0
b data file with suffix .DAT. b size of record configuration files encoded in 1 word
The data of each record may be transferred via the b size of record data files encoded in 1 words
Modbus link. It is possible to transfer 1 or 2 records to a b number of records encoded in 1 word
remote monitoring and control system. The record may b date of record (most recent) encoded in 4 words (see format below)
be transferred as many times as possible, until it is b date of record (least recent) encoded in 4 words (see format below)
overwritten by a new record. b 24 reserve words.
If a record is made by Sepam while the oldest record is All of these data are consecutive.
being transferred, the oldest record is altered.
If a command (e.g. a remote reading or remote setting Reading the contents of the different files
request) is carried out during the transfer of a Request frame
disturbance recording record, the record is not The master makes the request by writing the date of the record to be transferred
disturbed. (code 16) in 4 words starting at the address 2200h.
Time-setting It should be noted that requesting a new record amounts to stopping the transfers
Each record can be dated. which are in progress. This is not the case for an identification zone transfer request.
Time-setting of Sepam is described in the "Time- 2200h
tagging of events" section. B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
O O O O O O O O Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Transferring records O O O O M M M M O O O D D D D D
The transfer requests are made record by record, i.e.
O O O H H H H H O O mn mn mn mn mn mn
one configuration file and one data file per record.
ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms
The master sends the commands in order to:
b find out the characteristics of the records stored in an
identification zone Y - 1 byte for years: varies from 0 to 99 years.
b read the contents of the different files The master must ensure that the year 00 is greater than 99.
b acknowledge each transfer M - 1 byte for months: varies from 1 to 12.
b reread the identification zone to ensure that the
record still appears in the list of records available.
D - 1 byte for days: varies from 1 to 31.
H - 1 byte for hours: varies from 0 to 23.
mn - 1 byte for minutes: varies from 0 to 59.
5
ms - 2 bytes for milliseconds: varies from 0 to 59999.
Reply frame
Reading of each portion of configuration and data file records by a reading frame
(code 3) of 125-words starting at the address 2300h.
2300h
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Number of usable bytes
Exchange number
in the data zone
..............
Data zone
..............

Reading should always begin with the first word in the address zone (any other
address triggers an exception reply "incorrect address").
The configuration and data files are read in their entirety in Sepam. They are
transferred adjacently.

5/29
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 30 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Disturbance recording

If the master requests more exchanges than necessary, the exchange number
remains unchanged and the number of usable bytes is forced to 0. To guarantee the
data transfers, it is necessary to allow a response time of about 500 ms between
each reading operation at 2300h.
The first word transmitted is an exchange word. The exchange word comprises two
fields:
b the most significant byte contains the exchange number. It is incremented by 1 by
the Sepam each time a successful transfer takes place. When it reaches the value
FFh, it automatically goes back to zero
b the least significant byte contains the number of usable bytes in the data zone. It
is initialized to zero after energizing and must be different from FFh.
The exchange word may also have the following values:
b xxyy: the number of usable bytes in the data zone yy must be different from FFh
b 0000h: no "read requeste frame" has been formulated yet, as it is the case in
particular, when the Sepam is switched on. The other words are not significant,
b FFFFh: the "request frame" has been processed, but the results in the reply zone
are not yet available.
It is necessary to repeat "reply frame" reading.
The other words are not significant.
The words which follow the exchange word make up the data zone.
Since the configuration and data files are adjacent, a frame may contain the end of
the configuration file and the beginning of the data file of a record.
It is up to the remote monitoring and control system software to reconstruct the files
in accordance with the transmitted number of usable bytes and the size of the files
indicated in the identification zone.
Acknowledging a transfer
To inform the Sepam that a record block that it has just read has been received
correctly, the master must write the number of the last exchange that it has carried
out in the "exchange number" filed and set the "number of usable bytes in the data
zone" of the exchange word to zero.
The Sepam only increments the exchange number if new acquisition bursts are

5 present.
Rereading the identification zone
To ensure that the record has not been modified, during its transfer by a new record,
the master rereads the contents of the identification zone and ensures that the
recovered record date is still present.

5/30
PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 31 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication Reading Sepam identification

Presentation
The "Read Device Identification" function is used to access in a standardized manner
the information required to clearly identify a device.
The description is made up of a set of objects (ASCII character strings).
Sepam series 20 accepts the "read identification" function (conformity level 02).
For a complete description of the function, go to www.modbus.org. The description
below covers a subset of the function, adapted to Sepam series 20.

Implementation
Request frame
The request frame is made of the following components.
Field Size (bytes)
Slave number 1
43 (2Bh) 1 Generic access function code
14 (0Eh) 1 Read device identification
01 or 02 1 Type of read
00 1 Object number
CRC16 2

The type of read is used to select a simplified (01) or a standard (02) description.
Sepam series 20 identification Reply frame
The objects making up the Sepam series 20 The reply frame is made of the following components.:
identification are listed below. Field Size (bytes)
Number Type Value Slave number 1
0 VendorName "Merlin Gerin" 43 (2Bh) 1 Generic access function code
1 ProductCode Application EAN13 code 14 (0Eh) 1 Read device identification
2 MajorMinorRevision Application version number 01 or 02 1 Type of read
(Vx.yy) 02 1 Conformity level
3 VendorURL "www.schneider-electric.com" 00 1 Continuation-frame flag (none for Sepam)
4 ProductName "Sepam series 20" 00 1 Reserved
5

6
ModelName

UserAppName
Application name
(e.g. "M20 Motor")
Sepam marking
n
0bj1
lg1
1
1
1
Number of objects (according to read type)
Number of first object
Length first object
5
txt1 lg1 ASCII string of first object
..... ...
objn 1 Number nth object
lgn 1 Length nth object
txtn Ign ASCII string of n th object
CRC16 2

Exception frame
If an error occurs during request processing, a special exception frame is sent.
Field Size (bytes)
Slave number 1
171 (ABh) 1 Generic access exception (2Bh + 80h)
14 (0Eh) 1 Read device identification
01 or 03 1 Type of error
CRC16 2

5/31
 PCRED301005EN_5-Modbus_2004.FM Page 32 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:01 15

Modbus communication

5/32
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004TDM.fm Page 1 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Contents

Precautions
Equipment identification 6/2
Base unit 6/4
Dimensions 6/4
Assembly 6/5
Connection 6/6
Connection of current input 6/7
Other current input connection schemes 6/8
Other residual current input connection schemes 6/9
Connection of voltage inputs 6/10
Other voltage input connection schemes 6/11
Current transformers 1 A/5 A 6/12
LPCT type current sensors 6/13
CSH120 and CSH200 Core balance CTs 6/14
CSH30 interposing ring CT 6/15
ACE990 Core balance CT interface 6/16
Voltage transformers 6/18
MES114 modules 6/19
Optional remote modules 6/21
Connection 6/21
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module 6/22
MSA141 Analog output module 6/23
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module 6/24
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface 6/25
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface 6/26
ACE937 Fiber optic interface 6/27
ACE909-2 RS 232 / RS 485 converter
ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485 / RS 485 converters
6/28
6/30
6

6/1
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 2 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Precautions
Equipment identification

Precautions Equipment identification

We recommend that you follow the instructions given in Identification of the base unit
this document for quick, correct installation of your Each Sepam comes in a single package which contains the base unit and the base
Sepam: unit 20-pin connector (CCA620 or CCA622).
b equipment identification The other optional accessories such as mdoules, current or voltage input connectors
b assembly and cords come in separate packages.
b connection of current and voltage inputs, probes To identify a Sepam, check the 2 labels on the right side panel of the base unit which
b connection of power supply
describe the product’s functional and hardware features.
b checking prior to commissioning.

Handling, transport and storage b hardware reference and designation

Model
Sepam in its original packaging User Machine Interface
DE50531

Transport: Supply voltage

Sepam may be shipped to any destination without
talking any additional precautions by all usual means of
transport.
Handling:
Sepam may be handled without any particular care and
can even withstand being dropped by a person
handling it (person standing on floor).
Storage:
Sepam may be stored in its original packaging, in an
appropriate location for several years:
b temperature between -25 °C and +70 °C b functional reference and designation
b humidity y 90 %.
Periodic, yearly checking of the environment and the
Type of application
MT10451

Substation / Sous-station
packaging condition is recommended.
English/French Working language
Once Sepam has been unpacked, it should be
Modbus
energized as soon as possible. 0031412 C04
Sepam installed in a cubicle { Additional
Transport: information
Sepam may be transported by all usual means of (not given systematically)
S10 UX S20 J33 XXX
transport in the customary conditions used for cubicles.
Storage conditions should be taken into consideration
for a long period of transport.
Handling:

6 Should the Sepam fall out of a cubicle, check its

condition by visual inspection and energizing.
Identification of accessories
The accessories such as optional modules, current or voltage connectors and
Storage: connection cords come in separate packages, identified by labels.
Keep the cubicle protection packing for as long as b example of MES114 module identification label :
possible. Sepam, like all electronic units, should not be Part number
stored in a damp environment for more than a month.
MT10448

Sepam should be energized as quickly as possible. If

this is not possible, the cubicle reheating system should
be activated.
Commercial reference
Environment of the installed Sepam
Operation in a damp environment
The temperature/relative humidity factors must
compatible with the unit’s environmental withstand
characteristics.
If the use conditions are outside the normal zone,
commissioning arrangements should be made, such as
air conditioning of the premises.
Operation in a polluted atmosphere
A contaminated industrial atmosphere components
(such as the presence of chlorine, hydrofluoric acid,
sulfur, solvents...) may cause corrosion of the
electronic components, in which case environmental
control arrangements should be made (such as closed,
pressurized premises with filtered air, ...) for
commissioning.
The effect of corrosion on Sepam has been tested
according to the IEC 60068-2-60 standard. Sepam is
certified level C under the following test conditions:
21 days, 25 °C, 75 % relative humidity, 1 ppm H2S,
0.5 ppm SO2.

6/2
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 3 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Equipment identification

List of Sepam series 20 references

Reference Designation
59603 Base unit with basic UMI, 24-250 V DC and 100-240 V AC power supply (1)
59607 Base unit with advanced UMI, 24-250 V DC and 100-240 V AC power supply (1)
59608 DSM303, remote advanced UMI module

59609 Working language English/French

59611 Working language English/Spanish

59620 Substation application type S20

59621 Transformer application type T20
59622 Motor application type M20
59624 Busbar application type B21
59625 Busbar application type B22

59630 CCA630 connector for 1A/5A CT current sensors

59631 CCA670 connector for LPCT current sensors
59632 CCT640 connector for VT voltage sensors

59634 CSH30 interposing ring CT for Io input

59635 CSH120 residual current sensor, diameter 120 mm
59636 CSH200 residual current sensor, diameter 200 mm

59641 MET148-2 8-temperature sensor module

59642 ACE949-2-wire RS 485 network interface
59643 ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface
59644 ACE937 optical fibre interface

59646 MES114 10 input + 4 output module / 24-250 V DC (1)

59647 MSA141 1 analog output module
59648 ACE909-2 RS 485/RS 232 convertor
59649 ACE919CA RS 485/RS 485 interface (AC power supply)
59650 ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 interface (CC power supply)
59651 MES114E 10 input + 4 output module / 110-125 V DC and V AC
59652 MES114F 10 input + 4 output module / 220-250 V DC and V AC

59660
59661
CCA770 remote module cord, L = 0.6 m
CCA772 remote module cord, L = 2 m
6
59662 CCA774 remote module cord, L = 4 m
59663 CCA612 RS 485 network interface communication cord, L = 3 m
59664 CCA783 PC connection cord

59666 CCA613 LPCT remote test plug

59667 ACE917 LPCT injection adapter
59668 CCA620 20-pin screw type connector
59669 CCA622 20-pin ring lug connector
59670 AMT840 mounting plate
59671 Kit SFT2841 PC configuration software, with CCA783 cord
59672 ACE990 core balance CT interface for Io input

59676 Kit 2640 2 sets of spare connectors

(1) List of references cancelled and replaced:

b 59602 (base unit with basic UMI, 24 V DC power supply) cancelled and replaced by reference
59603
b 59606 (base unit with advanced UMI, 24 V DC power supply) cancelled and replaced by
reference 59607
b 59645 (MES108 4I/4O module) cancelled and replaced by reference 59646.

6/3
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 4 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Base unit

Dimensions
DE50928

DE50964
b Weight of Sepam series 20:
v 1.2 kg without options
v 1.7 kg with options

Front view of Sepam.

Side view of Sepam with advanced UMI and

MES114, flush-mounted in front panel.
Support frame: 1.5 mm to 3 mm thick.

Clearance for Sepam assembly

and wiring.
(1) With basic UMI: 23 mm.
DE50924

DE50925

Top view of Sepam with advanced UMI and

6 MES114, flush-mounted in front panel.

Support frame: 1.5 mm to 3 mm thick.

Cut-out.

Cutout accuracy must be complied with to ensure good

Sepam mechanical withstand.

AMT840 mounting plate

Used to mount Sepam at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors
on the rear panel.
DE50926

Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI (DSM303).
DE51054

Top view of Sepam with MES114, flush-mounted in front panel.

Mounting plate: 3 mm thick.

AMT840 mounting plate.

6/4
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 5 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Base unit

Assembly

The Sepam is simply flush-mounted and clamped, without requiring any additional
screw type fastening.
1 Present the product as
indicated, making sure the metal

DE51143
plate is correctly entered in the
groove at the bottom.
2 Tilt the product and press on
the top part to clamp it with the
clips.

6/5
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 6 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Base unit

Connection

Sepam components
b base unit 1
v A base unit connector:
- power supply,
- output relay,
- CSH30, 120, 200 or ACE990 input.
Screw-type connector shown (CCA620), or ring lug connector (CCA622)
v B 1/5 A CT current input connector (CCA630) or LPCT current input connector
(CCA670) or voltage input connector (CCT640)
v C communication module link connection (green)
v D remote inter-module link connection (black)
b optional input/output module 2 (MES108 or MES114)
v L M MES108 or MES114 module connectors
v K MES114 module connector.

2 1
DE51130

L 12
O14 B
11

9 O13
8

6 O12 A
5 CSH
19
3 O11
2 18
17

15
14
K 13 O4

11 O3
10
M
8
11 10 O2
10 I14 I26 7
I25 9
8 I24 8 5
I13 I23 7 O1
7 4
I22 6
5 5 2 -/
4 I12 4 1 +/

6 2
1 I11 I21 2
1 D

Connection of the base unit

DE51131

The Sepam connections are made to the removable connectors located on the rear
panel. All the connectors are screw-lockable.
For safety reasons (access to dangerous potentials), all the terminals must be
screwed tight, whether or not they are used.

Wiring of the CCA620 connector:

b without fitting:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires
with maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 1 mm2 (u AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm
b with fitting:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2
v tube length: 8.2 mm
v stripped length: 8 mm.
Wiring of the CCA622 connector:
b ring lug connectors 6.35 mm (1/4").
Characteristics of the 4 base unit relay outputs O1, O2, O3, O4.
b O1 and O2 are 2 control outputs, used by the breaking device control function for:
v O1: breaking device tripping
v O2: breaking device closing inhibition
b O3 and O4 are indication outputs, only O4 may be activated by the watchdog
function.

6/6
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 7 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Base unit

Connection of current input

DE51144

S20 / T20 / M20 types

Connection to 1 A / 5 A current sensors

Connector Type Ref. Cable

A Screw-type CCA620 1 wire 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
(u AWG 24-12)
2 wires 0.2 to 1 mm2
6
(u AWG 24-16)
Ring lug 6.35 mm CCA622
B Ring lug 4 mm CCA630 1.5 to 6 mm2
(AWG 16 to AWG 10)
C RJ45 CCA612
D RJ45 CCA770: L = 0.6 m
CCA772: L = 2 m
CCA774: L = 4 m

6/7
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 8 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Base unit

Other current input connection
schemes

Variant 1: phase current measurement by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)

Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector.
DE10206

The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.

Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs

Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 connector.
DE10207

Measurement of phase 1 and 3 currents is sufficient for all protection functions based
on phase current.

This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current.

Variant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensors

Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA670
connector. It is necessary to connect 3 sensors; if only one or two sensors are
DE10208

connected, Sepam goes into fail-safe position.

6 Measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.

The In parameter, primary rated current measured by an LPCT, is to be chosen from

the following values, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630,
666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
Parameter to be set using the advanced UMI and the SFT2841 software tool, to be
completed by hardware setting of the microswitches on the CCA670 connector.

6/8
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 9 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Base unit

Other residual current input
connection schemes

Variant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currents

Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and
I3, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors.
See current input connection diagrams.

Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT (standard connection)
Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral
systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected.
DE10209

Setting range from 0.01 In0 to 15 In0, with In0 = 2 A or 20 A according to parameter
setting.

Variant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT

The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to
measure residual current:
DE50384

b CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH

primary
b CSH30 interposing ring CT connected to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH
primary.

Setting range from 0.1 In0 to 15 In0, with In0 = CT primary current.

6
DE51166

Variant 4: residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)
The ACE990 is used as an interface between a MV core balance CT with a ratio of
1/n (50 y n y 1500) and the Sepam residual current input.
DE50530

This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the
installation.

Setting range from 0.1 In0 to 15 In0 (minimum 0.1 A),

with In0 = k.n,
n = number of core balance CT turns
and k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range
used by Sepam, with a choice of 20 discrete values from 0.00578
to 0.26316.

6/9
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 10 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Base unit

Connection of voltage inputs

B21 and B22 types

DE51157

Connector Type Ref. Cable

6 A Screw-type CCA620 1 wire 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
(u AWG 24-12)
2 wires 0.2 to 1 mm2
(u AWG 24-16)
Ring lug 6.35 mm CCA622
B Screw-type CCT640 1 wire 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
(u AWG 24-12)
2 wires 0.2 to 1 mm2
(u AWG 24-16)
C RJ45 CCA612
D RJ45 CCA770: L = 0.6 m
CCA772: L = 2 m
CCA774: L = 4 m

6/10
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 11 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Base unit

Other voltage input connection
schemes

The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the
CCT640 connector (item B ) on Sepam series 20, B type. The CCT640 connector
contains 4 transformers which perform isolation and impedance matching of the VTs
and Sepam input circuits.
Variant 1: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)
Phase voltage sensor parameter setting 3V
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting 3V sum
DE10201

Voltages measured V1, V2, V3

Values calculated U21, U32, U13, V0, Vd, f

Measurements unavailable None

Protection functions unavailable None
(according to type of Sepam)

Variant 2: measurement of 2 phase-to-neutral voltages and residual voltage

Phase voltage sensor parameter setting 3V
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting External VT
DE10202

Voltages measured V1, V2, V3, V0

Values calculated U21, U32, U13, Vd, f

Measurements unavailable None

Protection functions unavailable None
(according to type of Sepam)

Variant 3: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages

Phase voltage sensor parameter setting U21, U32
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting None
DE10203

Voltages measured U21, U32

Values calculated U13, Vd, f

Measurements unavailable V1, V2, V3, V0

Protection functions unavailable
(according to type of Sepam)
59N, 27S
6

Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltage

Phase voltage sensor parameter setting U21
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting External VT
DE10204

Voltages measured U21, V0

Values calculated f

Measurements unavailable U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, Vd

Protection functions unavailable 47, 27D, 27S
(according to type of Sepam)

Variant 5: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage

Phase voltage sensor parameter setting U21
Residual voltage sensor parameter setting None
DE10205

Voltages measured U21

Values calculated f

Measurements unavailable U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, V0, Vd

Protection functions unavailable 47, 27D, 59N, 27S
(according to type of Sepam)

6/11
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 12 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Current transformers 1 A/5 A

1 A or 5 A CT block and connection

diagram

DE51133
The current transformer (1 A or 5 A) secondary 12
O14 B
11
windings are connected to the CCA630 connector, item
9 O13
B. 8

6 O12
5 CSH
19
3 O11
2 18
17

15
14
13 O4

11 O3
10

8
11 10 O2
10 I14 I26 7
I25 9
8 I24 8 5
I13 I23 7 O1
7 4
I22 6
5 5 2 -/
4 I12 4 1 +/

2 2
1 I11 I21
1

CCA630 connector
EM
MT10464

The connector contains 3 interposing ring CTs with

through primaries, which ensure impedance matching P1
B4
and isolation between the 1 A or 5 A circuits and L1 B1
Sepam. B5 P2
The connector may be disconnected with the power on L2 B2
since disconnection does not open the CT secondary B6
circuits. L3 B3
(1)

CCA630
Sepam current
inputs 1 2 3

6 (1) bridging strap supplied with the CCA630.

CCA630 wiring
b open the 2 side shields for access to the connection
MT10318

terminals. The shields may be removed, if necessary, to

make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced
after wiring
b remove the bridging strap, if necessary. The strap
links terminals 1, 2 and 3
b connect the wires using 4 mm ring lugs and check
the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the
continuity of the CT secondary circuits. The connector
accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6
mm2 (AWG 16 to AWG 10)
b close the side shields
b plug the connector into the 9-pin inlet on the rear
panel, item B
b tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on
the rear panel of Sepam.

6/12
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 13 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation LPCT type current sensors

LPCT sensor block and connection

diagram

DE51142
The 3 LPCT current transformers are connected to the
CCA670 connector mounted in the rear panel of
Sepam, item B .
The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not
allowed and causes Sepam to go into the failsafe
position.

CCA670 connector parameter setting

The CCA670 connector should be calibrated at the time
of Sepam commissioning according to the following
instructions:
b use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the
“LPCT settings” zone; the shield protects 3 blocks of 8
microswitches marked L1, L2, L3
b on the L1 block, set the microswitch that corresponds
to the selected rated current to "1" (2 ratings possible
for each position)
v the rated current should be the same as the one set
in Sepam ("General characteristics“ menu via the
SFT2841 software tool, “Current sensors" screen with
advanced UMI)
v leave the 7 other microswitches set to “0”
b set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the
same position as block L1 and close the shield.

CCA613 remote test plug

6
MT11022

MT11056

MT11028

The CCA613 test plug, panel-mounted on the front of

the cubicle and fitted with a 3-meter cord, is used to
transfer data from the integrated test plug to the
CCA670 interface connector on the rear panel of
Sepam.
67,5
69
DE50564

44 46

Front view with cover lifted. Right side view. Cutout.

Accessory connection principle.

6/13
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 14 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation CSH120 and CSH200

Core balance CTs

Function
The specifically designed CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs are used for direct
residual current measurement. The only difference between them is the diameter.
PE50032

Due to their low voltage insulation, they may only be used on cables.

Characteristics
CSH120 CSH200
Inner diameter 120 mm 200 mm
Weight 0.6 kg 1.4 kg
Accuracy ±5% to 20°C
±6% max. from -25°C to 70°C
Transformation ratio 1/470
Maximum permissible current 20 kA - 1 s
Operating temperature - 25°C to +70°C
CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs. Storage temperature - 40°C to +85°C

Dimensions
DE10228

CSH120 and CSH200 core balance Dimen- A B D E F H J K L

CTs must be installed on insulated sions
cables. CSH120 120 164 44 190 76 40 166 62 35

6 Cables with rated voltages

exceeding 1000 V must also have an
earthed shield.
CSH200 200 256 46 274 120 60 257 104 37

Assembly
E40465

E40466

Group the MV cable (or cables) in the middle of the core balance CT.
Use non-conductive binding to hold the cables.
Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage cable shielding earthing cables through
the core balance CT.
DE50064

Assembly on MV cables. Assembly on mounting plate.

Connection
Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
Connection to Sepam series 80
b to residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
DE50065

b to residual current I’0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).

Recommended cable
b sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
b minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18)
b resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m
b minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V.
Connect the connection cable shielding in the shorter manner possible to the
shielding terminal on Sepam.
Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.
The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not be more
than 4 Ω.

6/14
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 15 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation CSH30 interposing ring CT

Function
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is
measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers.
E40468

E44717

Characteristics
Weight 0.2 kg
Vertical assembly of CSH30 Horizontal assembly of Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
interposing ring CT. CSH30 interposing ring CT. In vertical or horizontal position

Dimensions
DE50066

Connection
The CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer, 1 A or 5 A, by the number
of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT :
b 5 A rating - 4 turns
b 1 A rating - 2 turns.

Connection to 5 A secondary circuit Connection to 1 A secondary circuit

PE50033

PE50034

b plug into the connector b plug into the connector

b insert the transformer secondary wire b insert the transformer secondary wire
through the CSH30 core balance CT 4 through the CSH30 core balance CT
times. twice.

Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40

DE50283

To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).

Connection to Sepam series 80
b to residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
b to residual current I’0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended cable
b sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
b minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18) (max. 2.5 mm²)
b resistance per unit length < 100 mΩ/m
b minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V.
It is essential for the CSH30 to be installed near Sepam (Sepam - CSH30 link less
than 2 meters long).
Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.

6/15
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 16 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE990
Core balance CT interface

Function
The ACE990 interface is used to adapt measurements between a MV core balance
CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), and the Sepam residual current input.
PE50037

Characteristics
Weight 0.64 kg
Assembly Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail
Amplitude accuracy ±1%
Phase accuracy < 2°
Maximum permissible current 20 kA - 1 s
(on the primary winding of a MV core balance
CT with a ratio of 1/50 that does not saturate)
ACE990 core balance CT interface. Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C
Storage temperature -25°C to +70°C

Description and dimensions

E ACE990 input terminal block, for connection of the core balance CT.
DE50069

S ACE990 output terminal block, for connection of the Sepam residual current
input.

6/16
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 17 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE990
Core balance CT interface

Terminals connection
Connection of core balance CT
Only one core balance CT may be connected to the ACE990 interface.
DE50071

The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990

interface input terminals. To define the 2 inputs, it is necessary to know the following:
b core balance CT ratio (1/n)
b core balance CT power
b close approximation of rated current In0
(In0 is a Sepam general setting and defines the earth fault protection setting range
between 0.1 In0 and 15 In0).

The table below may be used to determine

b the 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT
secondary
b the type of residual current sensor to set
b the exact value of the rated residual current In0 setting, given by the following
formula: In0 = k x number of core balance CT turns
with k the factor defined in the table below.

The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for
correct operation: the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be
connected to the ACE990 input terminal with the lowest index (Ex).

K value ACE990 input Residual current Min. MV core

terminals to be sensor setting balance CT
connected power
Example: 0.00578 E1 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/400 2 VA, used within 0.00676 E2 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
a measurement range of 0.5 A to 60 A.
0.00885 E1 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990?
1. Choose a close approximation of the rated current In0, 0.00909 E3 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
i.e. 5 A. 0.01136 E2 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
2. Calculate the ratio: 0.01587 E1 - E3 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
approx. In0/number of turns = 5/400 = 0.0125.
0.01667 E4 - E5 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
3. Find the closest value of k in the table opposite:
k = 0.01136. 0.02000 E3 - E4 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
4. Check the mininum power required for the core balance CT: 0.02632 E2 - E3 ACE990 - range 1 0.1 VA
2 VA core balance CT > 0.1 VA V OK. 0.04000 E1 - E2 ACE990 - range 1 0.2 VA
5. Connect the core balance secondary to ACE990 input
terminals E2 and E4.
6. Set Sepam up with:
In0 = 0.0136 x 400 = 4.5 A.
This value of In0 may be used to monitor current between
0.05780
0.06757
0.08850
E1 - E5
E2 - E5
E1 - E4
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
ACE990 - range 2
2.5 VA
2.5 VA
3.0 VA
6
0.45 A and 67.5 A.
0.09091 E3 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 3.0 VA
Wiring of MV core balance secondary circuit: 0.11364 E2 - E4 ACE990 - range 2 3.0 VA
b MV core balance CT S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal 0.15873 E1 - E3 ACE990 - range 2 4.5 VA
b MV core balance CT S2 output to ACE990 E4 input terminal. 0.16667 E4 - E5 ACE990 - range 2 4.5 VA
0.20000 E3 - E4 ACE990 - range 2 5.5 VA
0.26316 E2 - E3 ACE990 - range 2 7.5 VA

Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40

To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
Connection to Sepam series 80
b to residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
b to residual current I’0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended cables
b cable between core balance CT and ACE990: less than 50 m long
b sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam,
maximum length 2 m
b cable cross-section between 0.93 mm² (AWG 18) and 2.5 mm² (AWG 13)
b resistance per unit length less than 100 mΩ/m
b minimum dielectric strength: 100 V.
Connect the ACE990 connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible
(2 cm maximum) to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector.
Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.

6/17
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 18 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Voltage transformers

The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the
CCT640 connector, item B on B2X type Sepam units.

CCT640
The connector contains 4 transformers which provide impedance matching and
isolation between the VTs and Sepam input circuits.
Terminals B1 to B6 are intended for phase voltage measurement (1), and B7 and B8
for residual voltage measurement (case shown, not connected if obtained by the sum
of the 3 phase voltages).
DE50565

(1) 1, 2 or 3 VTs (case shown).

Installation of the CCT640 connector

b insert the 2 connector pins into the slots 1 on the base unit
b flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9-pin SUB-D connector
(principle similar to that of the MES module)
b tighten the mounting screw 2 .

Connection
b the connections are made to the screw type connectors that may be accessed on
the rear of the CCT640 (item 3 )
b wiring without fitting:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires
with maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 1 mm2 (u AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm
6 b wiring with fitting:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting:
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2
- DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2
- AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2
v tube length: 8.2 mm
v stripped length: 8 mm
b the CCT640 must be earthed (by green/yellow wire + ring lug) on the screw 4
(safety in case the CCT640 become unplugged).
DE51135

MT10514

6/18
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 19 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation MES114 modules

Function
The 4 outputs included on the Sepam may be extended by adding an optional
MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs, available in 3 versions:
PE50300

b MES114: 10 DC inputs voltage from from 24 V DC to 250 V DC

b MES114E: 10 inputs, voltage 110-125 V AC or V DC
b MES114F: 10 inputs, voltage 220-250 V AC or V DC
The assignment of the inputs and outputs may be set up on the advanced UMI or
using the SFT2841 software tool.

Characteristics
MES114 module
Weight 0.28 kg
Operating -25 °C to +70 °C
temperature
Environmental Same characteristics as Sepam base units
characteristics
Logical inputs MES114 MES114E MES114F
Voltage 24 to 110 to 110 V AC 220 to 220 to
250 V DC 125 V DC 250 V DC 240 V AC
Range 19.2 to 88 to 88 to 176 to 176 to
275 V DC 150 VV DC 132 V AC 275 V DC 264 V AC
Frequency / / 47 to 63 Hz / 47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA 3 mA
Typical switching 14 V DC 82 V DC 58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC
threshold
Input limit At state 0 u 19 V DC u 88 V DC u 88 V AC u 176 V DC u 176 V AC
voltage At state 1 y 6 V DC y 75 V DC y 22 V AC y 137 V DC y 48 V AC
O11 control relay output
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC
AC 100 to
(47.5 to 240 V AC
63 Hz)
Continuous current 8A 8A 8A 8A
Breaking capacity Resistive 8/4A 0.7 A 0.3 A 8A
load
Load 6/2A 0.5 A 0.2 A
L/R < 20 ms
Load 4/1A 0.2 A 0.1 A
L/R < 40 ms
Load
cos ϕ > 0.3
5A
6
Making capacity < 15 A for 200 ms
O12 to O14 indication relay output
Voltage DC 24 / 48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC
AC 100 to
(47.5 to 240 V AC
63 Hz)
Continuous current 2A 2A 2A 2A
Breaking capacity Load 2/1A 0.5 A 0.15 A
L/R < 20 ms
Load 1A
cos ϕ > 0.3
Making capacity < 15 A for 200 ms

6/19
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 20 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation MES114 modules

Description
L , M and K : 3 removable, lockable screw-type connectors.
DE10226

L : connectors for 4 relay outputs:

b O11: 1 control relay output
b O12 to O14: 3 indication relay outputs.
M : connectors for 4 independent logic inputs I11 to I14
K : connectors for 6 logic inputs:
b I21: 1 independent logic input
b I22 to I26: 5 common point logic inputs.

1: 25-pin sub-D connector to connect the module to the base unit

2: voltage selector switche for MES114E and MES114F module inputs, to be set to:
v V DC for 10 DC voltage inputs (default setting)
v V AC for 10 AC voltage inputs.
3 : label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and
MES114F input voltages.

The parameter setting status may be accessed in the "Sepam Diagnosis" screen of
the SFT2841 software tool.
Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage (V AC setting) inhibits the "operating
time measurement" function.

Assembly
MT10479

b insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit
2 3 b flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2
b tighten the 3 mounting screws.

6
Connection
Dangerous voltages may be present on the terminal screws, whether the
terminals are used or not. To avoid all danger of electrical shock, tighten all
DE10227

terminal screws so that they cannot be touched inadvertently.

The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external.

Wiring of connectors L , M and K :

b wiring without fitting:
v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (> AWG 24-12)
v or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (> AWG 24-16)
v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm
b wiring with fittings:
v recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting:
- DZ5CE015D for one 1.5 mm² wire
- DZ5CE025D for one 2.5 mm² wire
- AZ5DE010D for two 1 mm² wires
v tube length: 8.2 mm
v stripped length: 8 mm.

6/20
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 21 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation Optional remote modules

Connection

The optional MET148-2, MSA141 or DSM303 modules are connected to the base
unit connector D by a series of links using prefabricated cords which come in 3
different lengths with black fittings.
b CCA770 (L = 0.6 m)
b CCA772 (L = 2 m)
b CCA774 (L = 4 m).
The DSM303 module may only be connected at the end of the series.
The MSA141 module must be the first one connected to the Sepam unit.
For the configuration that uses the 3 optional modules, comply with the wiring in the
diagram below.
DE50566

6/21
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 22 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation MET148-2
Temperature sensor module

Function
The MET148-2 module may be used to connect 8 temperature sensors (RTDs) of the
same type:
PE50021

b Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, according to parameter setting

b 3-wire temperature sensors
b a single module for each Sepam series 20 base unit, to be connected by one of
the CCA770, CCA772 or CCA774 cords (0.6 or 2 or 4 meters))
b 2 modules for each Sepam series 40 or series 80 base unit, to be connected by
CCA770, CCA772 or CCA774 cords (0.6 or 2 or 4 meters).
The temperature measurement (e.g. in a transformer or motor winding) is utilized by
the following protection functions:
b thermal overload (to take ambient termperature into account)
b temperature monitoring.
MET148-2 temperature sensor module.

Characteristics
MET148-2 module
Weight 0.2 kg
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
RTDs Pt100 Ni100 / Ni120
Isolation from earth None None
Current injected in RTD 4 mA 4 mA

Description and dimensions

DE50085

A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4.

B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8.
Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.
Dd RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord
(according to application).
t Grounding/earthing terminal.

1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position)
b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.

6 2 Jumper used to select module number, to be set to:

b MET1: 1st MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T1 to T8
(default position)
b MET2: 2nd MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T9 to T16
(for Sepam series 40 and series 80 only).

(1) 70 mm with CCA77x cord connected.

Connection
Connection of the earthing terminal
By tinned copper braid or cable fitted with a 4 mm ring lug.
Ensure correct tightening (maximum tightening torque is 2.2 Nm).
DE51150

Connection of RTDs to screw-type connectors

b 1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
b or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (u AWG 24-16).
Recommended cross-sections according to distance:
b up to 100 m u 1 mm², AWG 16
b up to 300 m u 1.5 mm², AWG 14
b up to 1 km u 2.5 mm², AWG 12
Maximum distance between sensor and module: 1 km.
Wiring precautions
b it is preferable to use shielded cables
The use of unshielded cables may cause measurement errors, which vary in degree
on the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance
b only connect the shielding at the MET148-2 end, in the shortest manner possible,
to the corresponding terminals of connectors A and B
b do not connect the shielding at the RTD end.
Accuracy derating according to wiring
The error ∆t is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the
cable cross-section:
L ( km ) b ±2.1°C/km for 0.93 mm² cross-section
∆t ( °C ) = 2 × ----------------------
2 b ±1°C/km for 1.92 mm² cross-section.
S ( mm )

6/22
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 23 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation MSA141
Analog output module

Function
The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog
signal:
Mt11009

b selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting

b 0-10 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting
b scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the
converted measurement.
Example: the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0-10 mA analog output with
a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is:
v minimum value = 0
v maximum value = 3000
b a single module for each Sepam base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770,
CCA772 or CCA774 cords (0.6 or 2 or 4 meters).
MSA141 analog output module. The analog output may also be remotely managed via the Modbus communication
network.

Characteristics
MSA141 module
Weight 0.2 kg
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Analog output
Current 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 mA
Scaling (no data input checking) Minimum value
Maximum value
Load impedance < 600 Ω (wiring included)
Accuracy 0.5 %
Measurements available Unit Series Series Series
20 40 80
Phase and residual currents 0.1 A b b b
Phase-to-neutral and phase-to-phase 1V b b b
voltages
Frequency 0.01 Hz b b b
Thermal capacity used 1% b b b
Temperatures 1°C b b b
Active power 0.1 kW b b
Reactive power 0.1 kVAR b b
Apparent power
Power factor
Remote setting via communication link
0.1 kVA
0.01
b
b

b
b
b
b
6
Description and dimensions
DE50084

A Terminal block for analog output.

Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.
Dd RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord
(according to application).
t Grounding/earthing terminal.

1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position)
b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.

(1) 70 mm with CCA77x cord connected.

Connection
Earthing terminal connection
By tinned copper braid or cable fitted with a 4 mm ring lug.
DE51151

Ensure correct tightening (maximum tightening torque is 2.2 Nm).

Connection of analog output to screw-type connector
b 1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (u AWG 24-12)
b or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (u AWG 24-16).
Wiring precautions
b it is preferable to use shielded cables
b use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end.

6/23
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 24 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation DSM303
Remote advanced UMI module

Function
When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user-machine
interface, the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated
PE50127

advanced UMI.
It may be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating
location:
b reduced depth (< 30 mm)
b a single module for each Sepam, to be connected by one of the CCA772 or
CCA774 cords (2 or 4 meters).

The module may not be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs.

Characteristics
DSM303 module
Weight 0.3 kg
Assembly Flush-mounted
Operating temperature -25°C to +70°C
DSM303 remote advanced UMI module.
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units

Description and dimensions

The module is flush-mounted and secured simply by its clips. No screw-type fastener
is required.

Side view Cut-out for flush-mounting (mounting plate

thickness < 3 mm)
DE50063

DE50055

6
1 Green LED: Sepam on.
2 Red LED:
- steadily on: module unavailable
- flashing: Sepam link unavailable.
3 9 yellow indicator LEDs. Da RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with a
4 Graphical LCD screen. CCA77x cable.
5 Display of measurements.
6 Display of switchgear, network and machine 1 Mounting clip.
diagnosis data. 2 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tighteness
7 Display of alarm messages. (gasket delivered with the DSM303 module, to be installed if necessary).
8 Sepam reset (or confirm data entry).
9 Alarm acknowledement and clearing
(or move cursor up).
10 LED test (or move cursor down).
11 Access to protection settings.
12 Access to Sepam parameters.
13 Entry of 2 passwords.
14 PC RS 232 connection port.

Connection
Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.
MT10151

The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it
systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor (Rc).

6/24
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 25 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE949-2
2-wire RS 485 network interface

Function
The ACE949-2 interface performs 2 functions:
b electrical interface between Sepam and a 2-wire RS 485 communication network
PE50029

b main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612
cord.

Characteristics
ACE949-2 module
Weight 0.1 kg
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Operating temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
2-wire RS 485 electrical interface
Standard EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10 %
Consumption 16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA maximum in sending mode
Maximum length of 2-wire RS 485 network with standard cable
DE50074

Number of Sepam Maximum length with Maximum length with

units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply
5 320 m 1000 m
10 180 m 750 m
20 160 m 450 m
25 125 m 375 m
Nota : lengths multiplied by 3 with FILECA F2644-1 high-performance cable.

Description and dimensions

A and B Terminal blocks for network cable.
C RJ45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord.
t Grounding/earthing terminal.

(1) 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected.

1 Activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in
progress).
6
2 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
(Rc = 150 Ω), to be set to:
b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the RS 485 network (default position)
b Rc, if the module is at one end of the RS 485 network.
3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm).

Connection
b connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B
b connection of earthing terminal by tinned copper braid or cable fitted with 4 mm
DE51055

ring lug. Ensure correct tightening (maximum tightening torque is 2.2 Nm).
b the interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover
shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp
b the interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
cord (length = 3 m, green fittings)
b the interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC.

6/25
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 26 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE959
4-wire RS 485 network interface

Function
The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions:
b electrical interface between Sepam and a 4-wire RS 485 communication network
PE50023

b main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612
cord.

Characteristics
ACE959 module
Weight 0.2 kg
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network connection interface. Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
4-wire RS 485 electrical interface
Standard EIA 4-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10 %
Consumption 16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA maximum in sending mode
DE50083

Maximum length of 4-wire RS 485 network with standard cable

Number of Sepam Maximum length with Maximum length with
units 12 V DC power supply 24 V DC power supply
5 320 m 1000 m
10 180 m 750 m
20 160 m 450 m
25 125 m 375 m
Nota : lengths multiplied by 3 with FILECA F3644-1 high-performance cable.

Description and dimensions

A and B Terminal blocks for network cable.
C RJ45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord.

D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply (12 V DC or 24 V DC).

6 (1) 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected.

t Grounding/earthing terminal.

1 Activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in

progress).
2 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
DE51056

(Rc = 150 Ω), to be set to:

b Rc , if the module is not at one end of the RS 485 network (default position)
b Rc, if the module is at one end of the RS 485 network.
3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm).

Connection
b connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B
b connection of earthing terminal by tinned copper braid or cable fitted with 4 mm
ring lug. Ensure correct tightening (maximum tightening torque is 2.2 Nm).
b the interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover
shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable:
v the network cable must be stripped
v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp
b the interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
cord (length = 3 m, green fittings)
b the interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC
b the ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply (not
included in shielded cable). Terminal block D is used to connect the distributed
power supply module.

6/26
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 27 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE937
Fiber optic interface

Function
The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star
system.
PE50024

This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord.

Characteristics
ACE937 module
Weight 0.1 kg
Assembly On symmetrical DIN rail
Power supply Supplied by Sepam
Operating temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
Environmental characteristics Same characteristics as Sepam base units
ACE937 fiber optic connection interface.
Fiber optic interface
Wavelength 820 nm (infra-red)
Type of connector ST
Fiber type Multimode glass
Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum
diameter aperture attenuation power available length of
(µm) (NA) (dBm/km) (dBm) fiber (m)
50/125 0.2 2.7 5.6 700
62.5/125 0.275 3.2 9.4 1800
100/140 0.3 4 14.9 2800
200 (HCS) 0.37 6 19.2 2600

Maximum length calculated with:

b minimum optical power available
b maximum fiber attenuation
b losses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm
b optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC60870 standard).
Example for a 62.5/125 µm fiber
Lmax = (9.4 - 3 -0.6) / 3.2 = 1.8 km.

Description and dimensions

DE50273

C RJ 45 plug to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord.

1 Activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in

6
progress).
2 Rx, female ST type connector (Sepam receiving).
3 Tx, female ST type connector (Sepam sending).

(1) 70 mm with CCA612 cord connected.

Connection
b the sending and receiving fiber optics fibers must be equipped with male ST type
DE50274

connectors
b fiber optics screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors
b the interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612
cord (length = 3 m, green fittings)

6/27
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 28 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE909-2
RS 232 / RS 485 converter

Function
The ACE909-2 converter is used to connect a master/central computer equipped
with a V24/RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a
PE50035

2-wire RS 485 network.

Without requiring any flow control signals, after the parameters are set, the
ACE909-2 converter performs conversion, network polarization and automatic
dispatching of Modbus frames between the master and the stations by two-way
simplex (half-duplex, single-pair) transmission.
The ACE909-2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the
distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2 or ACE959 interfaces.
The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and master
communication settings.

Characteristics
Mechanical characteristics
ACE909-2 RS 232 / RS 485 converter. Weight 0.280 kg
Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
Electrical characteristics
Power supply 110 to 220 V AC ±10%, 47 to 63 Hz
Galvanic isolation 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
between power supply and frame, and
between power supply and interface supply
Galvanic isolation 1000 Vms, 50 Hz, 1 min
between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating
Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply
Data format 11 bits: 1 start, 8 bits, 1 parity, 1 stop
Transmission delay < 100 ns
distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces 12 V DC or 24 V DC
Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12
distributed supply
Environmental characteristics
Operating temperature -5 °C to +55 °C
Electromagnetic compatibility IEC Value
standard
6 5 ns fast transient bursts 60255-22-4 4 kV with capacitive
coupling in common mode
2 kV with direct coupling in
common mode
1 kV with direct coupling in
differential mode
1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255-22-1 1 kV common mode
0.5 kV differential mode
1.2, 50 µs impulse wave 60255-5 3 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode

6/28
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 29 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE909-2
RS 232 / RS 485 converter

Description and dimensions

A Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m.
DE50037

B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power supply terminal block.

1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.

2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn.
3 Indication LEDs:
b ON/OFF: on if ACE909-2 is energized
b Tx: on if RS 232 sending by ACE909-2 is active
b Rx on: if RS 232 receiving by ACE909-2 is active
4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and line
impedance matching resistors
Function SW1/1 SW1/2 SW1/3
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 Ω ON
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 Ω ON
2-wire RS 485 network impedance ON
DE50038

matching by 150 Ω resistor

5 SW2, parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format

(same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2-wire RS 485 network).
Rate (bauds) SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/3
1200 1 1 1
2400 0 1 1
4800 1 0 1
9600 0 0 1
Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE909-2. 19200 1 1 0
38400 0 1 0
Format SW2/4 SW2/5
With parity check 0
Without parity check 1
1 stop bit (compulsory for Sepam) 0
DE50039

2 stop bits 1

Converter configuration when delivered

b 12 V DC distributed power supply
6
b 11 bit format, with parity check
b 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.

Connection
RS 232 link
b to 2.5 mm² screw-type terminal block A
b maximum length 10 m
b Rx/Tx: RS 232 receiving/sending by ACE909-2
b 0V: Rx/Tx common, do not earth.
2-wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply
b to female 9-pin sub-D connector B
b 2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, L-
b distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V.
Power supply
b to 2.5 mm² screw-type terminal block C
b reversible phase and neutral
b earthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).

6/29
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 30 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE919CA and ACE919CC

RS 485 / RS 485 converters

Function
The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master/central computer equipped
with an RS 485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a
PE50036

2-wire RS 485 network.

Without requiring any flow control signals, the ACE919 converters perform network
polarization and impedance matching.
The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed
power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2 or ACE959 interfaces.
There are 2 types of ACE919:
b ACE919CC, DC-powered
b ACE919CA, AC-powered.

Characteristics
Mechanical characteristics
Weight 0.280 kg
ACE919CC RS 485 / RS 485 converter. Assembly On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
Electrical characteristics ACE919CA ACE919CC
Power supply 110 to 220 V AC 24 to 48 V DC ±20%
±10%, 47 to 63 Hz
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating 1 A rating
Galvanic isolation 2000 Vrms, 50 Hz,
between power supply and frame, and 1 min
between power supply and interface supply

Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply

Data format 11 bits: 1 start, 8 bits, 1 parity, 1 stop
Transmission delay < 100 ns
Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces 12 V DC or 24 V DC
Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with 12
distributed supply
Environmental characteristics
Operating temperature -5 °C to +55 °C
Electromagnetic compatibility IEC Value
standard
5 ns fast transient bursts 60255-22-4 4 kV with capacitive

6 coupling in common mode

2 kV with direct coupling in
common mode
1 kV with direct coupling in
differential mode
1 MHz damped oscillating wave 60255-22-1 1 kV common mode
0.5 kV differential mode
1.2, 50 µs impulse wave 60255-5 3 kV common mode
1 kV differential mode

6/30
PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 31 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

Installation ACE919CA and ACE919CC

RS 485 / RS 485 converters

Description and dimensions

A Terminal block for 2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply.
DE50067

B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power supply terminal block.

1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.

2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn.
3 ON/OFF LED: on if ACE919 is energized.
4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance
matching resistors.
Function SW1/1 SW1/2 SW1/3
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470 Ω ON
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470 Ω ON
2-wire RS 485 network impedance ON
matching by 150 Ω resistor
DE50038

Converter configuration when delivered

b 12 V DC distributed power supply
b 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.

Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE919.

Connection
2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply
b to 2.5 mm² screw-type terminal block A
b L+, L-: 2-wire RS 485 signals
b t Shielding.
DE50040

2-wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply

b to female 9-pin sub-D connector B
b 2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, L-
b distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V.
Power supply 6
b to 2.5 mm² screw-type terminal block C
b reversible phase and neutral (ACE919CA)
b earthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).

6/31
 PCRED301005EN_6-Installation_2004.FM Page 32 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:03 15

6/32
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004TDM.fm Page 1 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:10 15

Use Contents

User Machine Interfaces 7/2

SFT2841 setting and operating software 7/3
Presentation 7/3
General screen organization 7/4
Use of the software 7/5
UMI on front panel 7/6
Presentation 7/6
Advanced UMI 7/7
Access to data 7/7
White keys for current operation 7/8
Blue keys for parameter and protection setting 7/10
Data entry principles 7/12
Default parameter setting 7/13
Commissioning: principles and method 7/15
Testing and metering equipment required 7/16
General examination and preliminary actions 7/17
Checking of parameter and protection settings 7/18
Checking of phase current input connection 7/19
Checking of residual current input connection 7/20
Checking phase voltage input connection 7/21
Checking of residual voltage input connection 7/22
Checking of logic input and output connection 7/23
Validation of the complete protection chain 7/24
Checking of optional module connection 7/25
Test sheet 7/26
Maintenance 7/27

7/1
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 2 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use User Machine Interfaces

Two different levels of user machine interface (UMI) are offered on the front panel of
Sepam:
b basic UMI, with signal lamps, for installations operated via a remote system with
no need for local operation
b advanced UMI, with keypad and graphic LCD display, giving access to all the
information necessary for local operation and Sepam parameter setting.

The UMI on the front panel of Sepam may be completed by the SFT2841 PC
software tool, which may be used for all Sepam parameter setting, local operation
and customization functions.

The SFT2841 software comes as a kit, the SFT2841 kit, which includes:
b a CD-ROM, with
v SFT2841 setting and operation software
v SFT2826 disturbance recording file display software
b CCA783 cord, for connection between the PC and the serial port on the front panel
of Sepam.
PE50336

7/2
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 3 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use SFT2841 setting and operating

software
Presentation

All the setting and operating functions are available on

the screen of a PC equipped with the SFT2841

PE10051
software tool and connected to the RS 232 link on the
front panel of Sepam (run in a Windows u V98 or NT
environment).
All the data used for the same task are grouped
together in the same screen to facilitate operation.
Menus and icons are used for fast, direct access to the
required information.

Current operation
b display of all metering and operation data
b display of alarm messages with the time of
appearance (date, hour, mn, s, ms)
b display of diagnosis data such as: tripping current,
number of switchgear operations and cumulative
breaking current
b display of all the protection and parameter settings
b display of the logic status of inputs, outputs and
signal lamps.
This software is the solution suited to occasional local
operation, for demanding personnel who require fast
access to all the information.
Example of a measurement display screen (Sepam M20).
Parameter and protection setting (1)
b display and setting of all the parameters of each
protection function in the same page
b program logic parameter setting, parameter setting
PE10052

of general installation and Sepam data

b input data may be prepared ahead of time and
transferred into the corresponding Sepam units in a
single operation (downloading function).

Main functions performed by SFT2841:

b changing of passwords
b entry of general characteristics (ratings, integration
period, …)
b entry of protection settings
b changing of program logic assignments
b enabling/disabling of functions
b saving of files.
Saving
b protection and parameter setting data may be saved
b printing of reports is possible as well.
This software may also be used to recover disturbance
recording files and provide graphic display using the
SFT2826 software tool.
Operating assistance
7
Access from all the screens to a help section which Example of a phase overcurrent protection setting screen.
contains all the technical data required for Sepam
installation and use.

(1) Modes accessed via 2 passwords (protection setting level,

parameter setting level).

7/3
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 4 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use SFT2841 setting and operating

software
General screen organization

A Sepam document is displayed on the screen via a A

graphic interface that has the conventional Windows B

PE10053
features. C
All the SFT2841 software screens are set up in the
same way, i.e.:
b A : title bar, with:
v name of the application (SFT2841)
v identification of the Sepam document displayed D
v window manipulation handles
b B : menu bar, to access all the SFT2841 software
functions (unavailable functions are dimmed)
b C : toolbar, a group of contextual icons for quick
access to the main functions (also accessed via the
menu bar)
b D : work zone available to the user, presented in the
form of tab boxes
b E : status bar, with the following information relating
to the active document:
alarm on
v identification of the connection window
v SFT2841 operating mode, connected or not E
connected, Example of Sepam configuration screen.
v type of Sepam
v Sepam editing identification
v identification level
v Sepam operating mode
PE10054

v PC date and time.

On-line help
The operator may look up on-line help at any time via
the "?" command in the menu bar.
To use the on-line help, a browser such as Netscape
Navigator or Internet Explorer MS is required.

7 Example of general characteristics screen.

7/4
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 5 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use SFT2841 setting and operating

software
Use of the software

Not connected to Sepam mode Connected to Sepam mode

Sepam parameter and protection setting Precaution
The parameter and protection setting of a Sepam using When a laptop is used, given the risks inherent to the accumulation of static
SFT2841 consists of preparing the Sepam file electricity, the customary precaution consists of discharging in contact with an
containing all the characteristics that are specific to the earthed metal frame before phsycially connecting the CCA783 cord (supplied with
application, a file that is then downloaded into Sepam the SFT2841 kit).
at the time of commissioning. Plugging into Sepam
Operating mode: b plugging of the 9-pin connector (SUB-D type) into one of the PC communication
b create a Sepam file for the type of Sepam to be set ports. Configuration of the PC communciation port via the "Communication port"
up. (The newly created file contains the Sepam factory- function in the "Options" menu
set parameter and protection settings) b plugging of the 6-pin connector into the connector (round minidin type) situated
b modify the "Sepam" page function sheet parameters behind the blanking plate on the front panel of Sepam or the DSM303 module.
and the "Protections" page function sheet protection
Connection to Sepam
settings.
2 possibilities for setting up the connection between SFT2841 and Sepam:
A guided mode may be used to go through all the
b "Connection" function in the "File" menu
function sheets to be modified in the natural order.
b choice of "connect to the Sepam" at the start-up of SFT2841.
The screens may be sequenced in guided mode by
Once the connection with Sepam has been established, "Connected" appears in the
means of the "Previous screen" and "Next screen"
status bar, and the Sepam connection window may be accessed in the work zone.
functions in the "Options" menu, which are also
available in the form of icons in the toolbar. User identification
The screens / function sheets are sequenced in the The window intended for the entry of the 4-digit password is activated:
following order: b via the "Passwords" tab
1. "Sepam configuration", b via the "Identification" function in the "Sepam" menu
2. "Program logic", b via the "Identification" icon .
The "return to Operating mode" function in the "Passwords" tab removes access
3. "General characteristics",
rights to parameter and protection setting mode.
4. protection setting screens, according to the type of
Sepam, Downloading of parameters and protection settings
5. "Control matrix" Parameter and protection setting files may only be downloaded in the connected
Modification of function sheet contents: Sepam in Parameter setting mode.
b the parameter and protection setting input fields are Once the connection has been established, the procedure for downloading a
suited to the type of value: parameter and protection setting file is as follows:
v choice buttons b activate the "Download Sepam" function in the "Sepam" menu
v numerical value input fields b select the *.rpg file which contains the data to be downloaded
v dialogue box (Combo box) b acknowledge the end of operation report.
b the modifications made to a function sheet are to be Return to factory settings
"Applied" or "Canceled" before the user goes on to the This operation is only possible in Parameter setting mode, via the "Sepam" menu. All
following function sheet of the Sepam general characteristics, protection settings and the control matrix go
b the consistency of the parameter and protection back to the default values.
settings entered is checked:
v a clear message specifies the inconsistent value in Uploading of parameter and protection settings
the function sheet opened The connected Sepam parameter and protection setting file may only be uploaded in
v values which become inconsistent following the Operating mode.
modification of a parameter are replaced by "****" and Once the connection has been established, the procedure for uploading a parameter
must be corrected. and protection setting file is as follows:
b activate the "Upload Sepam" function in the "Sepam" menu
b select the *.rpg file that is to contain the uploaded data
b acknowledge the end of operation report.
Local operation of Sepam
7
Connected to Sepam, SFT2841 offers all the local operating functions available in the
advanced UMI screen, plus the following functions:
b setting of Sepam internal clock, via the "general characteristics" tab
b implementation of the disturbance recording function, via the "Fault recording"
menu "OPG": validation/inhibition of the function, recovery of Sepam files, start-up of
SFT2826
b consultation of the history of the last 64 Sepam alarms, with time-tagging
b access to Sepam diagnostic data, in the "Sepam" tab box, included in "Sepam
diagnosis"
b in Parameter setting mode, the switchgear diagnositic values may be modified:
operation counter, cumulative breaking current to reset the values after a change of
breaking device.

7/5
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 6 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use UMI on front panel

Presentation

Basic UMI

MT10276
This UMI includes: on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
b 2 signal lamps indicating Sepam operating status:
v green "on" indicator: device on
v red "wrench" indicator: device unavailable
(initialization phase or detection of internal failure)
b 9 parameterizable yellow signal lamps, fitted with a
standard label (with SFT2841, a customized label can reset
be printed on a laser printer)
b "reset" button for clearing faults and resetting
b 1 connection port for the RS 232 link with the PC
(CCA783 cord), the connector is protected by a sliding
cover.

Fixed or remote advanced UMI

on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
MT10822

In addition to the basic UMI functions, this version

provides:
b a "graphic" LCD display for the display of
measurements, parameter/protection settings and alarm
and operating messages.
The number of lines, size of characters and symbols 1
are in accordance with the screens and language
versions. I1= 162A RMS
The LCD display retrolighting may be activated by
pressing a key.
I2= 161A RMS 2
b a 9-key keypad with 2 operating modes:
v white keys for current operation:
I3= 163A RMS
3
1 display of measurements,
2 display of "switchgear, network diagnosis" data,
3 display of alarm messages,
4 resetting, clear reset
5 acknowledgment and clearing of alarms.
v blue keys activated in parameter and protection
setting mode:
7 access to protection settings,
8 access to Sepam parameter setting,
9 used to enter the 2 passwords required to change
9 8 7 6 5 4
protection and parameter settings.
The "↵, r , " ( 4 , 5 , 6 ) keys are used to browse
r
through the menus and to scroll and accept the values
7 displayed.
6 "lamp test" keys:
switching on sequence of all the signal lamps.

7/6
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 7 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use Advanced UMI

Access to data

Access to measurements and Example: measurement loop

parameters energizing
of Sepam

MT10885
The measurements and parameters may be accessed
using the metering, diagnosis, status and protection
keys. They are arranged in a series of screens as
shown in the diagram opposite.
Measurements
b the data are split up by category in 4 loops, numerical values
associated with the following 4 keys: I rms
v key : measurements
v key : switchgear diagnosis and additional
measurements
Measurements
v key : general settings bar graphs
v key : protection settings.
b when the user presses a key, the system moves on
to the next screen in the loop. When a screen includes clear
more than 4 lines, the user moves about in the screen
Average I
via the cursor keys ( , ).

clear

Overcurrent

Io
bar graph

Temperatures
1 to 4
temperature sensors

Temperatures
5 to 8
temperature sensors

Protection and parameter setting modes

on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
MT10808

There are 3 levels of use:

b operator level: used to access all the screens in read
mode and does not require any passwords
b protection setter level: requires the entry of the first
password ( key), allows protection setting (
b parameter setter level: requires the entry of the
key) 7
second password ( key), allows modification of the passwords
general settings as well ( key).
Only general setters may modify the passwords.
The passwords have 4 digits.

apply cancel

clear reset

7/7
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 8 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use Advanced UMI

White keys for current operation

key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip

MT10829
The "metering" key is used to display the variables
measured by Sepam.

I1= 162A RMS

I2= 161A RMS
I3= 163A RMS

clear reset

key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
MT10286

The “diagnosis” key provides access to diagnostic data

on the breaking device and additional measurements,
to facilitate fault analysis.

TripI1 = 162A
TripI2 = 161A
TripI3 = 250A
TripIo = 250A

clear reset

7 key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
MT10287

The “alarms” key is used to consult the 16 most recent

alarms that have not yet been cleared.

0 Io FAULT
-1
-2
-3

clear reset

7/8
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 9 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use Advanced UMI

White keys for current operation

reset
key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip

MT10906
The “reset” key resets Sepam (extinction of signal
lamps and resetting of protection units after the
disappearance of faults).
The alarm messages are not erased.

2001 / 10 / 06 12:40:50

PHASE FAULT 1A
Trip I1 = 162A
Trip I2 = 161A
Trip I3 = 250A

clear reset

clear
key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
MT10833

When an alarm is present on the Sepam display, the

"clear" key is used to return to the screen that was
present prior to the appearance of the alarm or to a less
recent unacknowledged alarm. Sepam is not reset.
In the metering or diagnosis or alarm menus, the "clear"
key may be used to reset the average currents, peak
demand currents, running hours counter and alarm
I1max = 180A
stack when they are shown on the display.
I2max = 181A
I3max = 180A

clear reset

key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on
7
Trip
MT10283

Press the "lamp test" key for 5 seconds to start up a

LED and display test sequence.
When an alarm is present, the "lamp test" key is
disabled.

I1= 162A RMS

I2= 161A RMS
I3= 163A RMS

clear reset

7/9
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 10 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use Advanced UMI

Blue keys for parameter
and protection setting

key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip

MT10810
The “status” key is used to display and enter the Sepam
general settings. They define the protected equipment
characteristics and the different optional modules.

General settings
language frequency
English 50 Hz
French 60 Hz
A/B choice (A actif)
=A

clear reset

key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
MT10811

The “protection” key is used to display, set and enable

or disable the protection units.

50/51 1 A Off
On
Trip
Curve = inverse
Threshold = 110 A
Delay = 100 ms

clear reset

7 key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
MT10808

The "wrench" key is used to enter the passwords for

access to the different modes:
b protection setting
b parameter setting.
and return to "operating" mode (with no passwords).
passwords

apply cancel

clear reset

7/10
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 11 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use Advanced UMI

Blue keys for parameter
and protection setting

reset
key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip

MT10812
The key is used to confirm the protection settings,
parameter settings and passwords.

50/51 1 A Off
On
Trip
Curve = SIT
Threshold = 550 A
Delay = 600 ms

clear reset

clear
key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
MT10812

When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and

the user is in the status, protection or alarm menu, the
key is used to move the cursor upward.

50/51 1 A Off
On
Trip
Curve = SIT
Threshold = 550 A
Delay = 600 ms

clear reset

key
on I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext 0 off I on Trip
7
MT10812

When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and

the user is in the status, protection or alarm menu, the
key is used to move the cursor downward.

50/51 1 A Off
On
Trip
Curve = SIT
Threshold = 550 A
Delay = 600 ms

clear reset

7/11
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 12 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use Advanced UMI

Data entry principles

Use of passwords Modification of passwords

Sepam has two 4-digit passwords: Only the parameter setting qualification level (2 keys) or the SFT2841 allow
b the first password, symbolized by a key, is used to modification of the passwords. Passwords are modified in the general settings
modify the protection settings screen, key.
b the second password, symbolized by two keys, is
used to modify the protection settings and all the Loss of passwords
general settings. If the factory-set passwords have been modified and the latest passwords entered
The 2 factory-set passwords are: 0000 have been irretrievably lost by the user, please contact your local after-sales service
representative.
Entry of passwords Entry of parameters or settings
Press the key to display the following screen: Principle applicable to all Sepam screens
passwords (example of phase overcurrent protection)
b enter the password
MT10816

b access the corresponding screen by successively pressing the key

b move the cursor by pressing the key for access to the desired field (e.g. curve)
b press the key to confirm the choice, then select the type of curve by pressing
reset

the or key and confirm by pressing the key

reset

b press the key to reach the following fields, up to the apply box. Press
apply cancel the key to confirm the setting.
reset

Press the key to position the cursor on the first digit.

reset
Entry of numerical values
0 XXX (e.g. current threshold value).
Scroll the digits using the cursor keys ( , ), then b position the cursor on the required field using the keys and confirm the
confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing the key.
reset
choice by pressing the reset
key
Do not use characters other than numbers 0 to 9 for b select the first digit to be entered and set the value by pressing the keys
each of the 4 digits. (choice of . 0……9)
When the password for your qualification level is b press the reset
key to confirm the choice and go on to the following digit.
entered, press the key to position the cursor on the The values are entered with 3 significant digits and a period.
apply box. Press the key again to confirm.
reset The unit (e.g. A or kA) is chosen using the last digit.
When Sepam is in protection setting mode, a key b press the key to confirm the entry, then press the key for access to the following
reset

appears at the top of the display. field

When Sepam is in parameter setting mode, two keys b all of the values entered are only effective after the user confirms by selecting the
appear at the top of the display. apply box at the bottom of the screen and presses the reset
key.

Off
MT10817

On
Trip
curve = definitive
thershold = 120 A
delay = 100 ms

response time

7 curve
delay
= definitive
= 0 ms

apply cancel

Access to the protection setting or parameter setting

modes is disabled:
b by pressing the key
b automatically if no keys are activated for more than 5
minutes.

7/12
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 13 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use Default parameter setting

The Sepam units are delivered with default parameter S20, T20 and M20 applications
setting and protection setting according to the type of Hardware configuration
application. b identification: Sepam xxxx
These "factory" settings are also used with the b model: UX
SFT2841 software: b MES module: absent
b for the creation of new files in not connected mode b MET module: absent
b for a return to the "factory" settings in connected b MSA module: absent
mode. b DSM module: present
b ACE module: absent.
Output parameter setting
b outputs used: O1 to O4
b shunt trip units: O1, O3
b undervoltage trip units: O2, O4
b impulse mode: no (latched).
Program logic
b circuit breaker control: no
b logic discrimination: no
b logic input assignment: not used.
General characteristics
b network frequency: 50 Hz
b group of settings: A
b enable remote setting: no
b working language: English
b CT rating: 5 A
b number of CTs: 3 (l1, l2, l3)
b rated current In: 630 A
b basic current Ib: 630 A
b integration period: 5 mn
b residual current: 3I sum
b pre-trig for disturbance recording: 36 periods.
Protection functions
b all the protections are "off"
b the settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with
the general characteristics by default (in particular rated current In)
b tripping behavior:
v latching: yes
v activation of output O1: yes
v disturbance recording triggering: with.
Control matrix
Each Sepam has program logic by default according to the type (S20, T20,…) as well
as messages for the different signal lamps.
The functions are assigned according to the most frequent use of the unit. This
parameter setting may be customized if required using the SFT2841 software
package.
b S20 application:
v activation of output O2 upon protection tripping
7
v activation of indicators according to front panel markings
v watchdog on output O4
v disturbance recording triggering upon signal pick-up.
b complements for T20 application:
v activation of O1 without latching upon tripping of temperature monitoring 1 to 7
v activation of O1 and indicator L9 without latching upon thermal overload tripping.
b complements for M20 application:
v activation of outputs O1 and O2 and indicator L9 upon tripping of functions 37
phase undercurrent) and 51 LR (locked rotor)
v activation of output O2 upon tripping of function 66 (starts per hour)
v latching for function 51 LR.

7/13
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 14 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Use Default parameter setting

B21(1) and B22 applications Protection functions

Hardware configuration b all the protection functions are "off"
b identification: Sepam xxxx b the settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with
b model: UX the general characteristics by default
b MES module: absent b latching: no
b MET module: absent b disturbance recording triggering: with.
b MSA module: absent Control matrix
b DMS module: present b assignment of output relays and indicators according to chart:
b ACE module: absent. Functions Outputs Indicators
Output parameter setting B21 B22 O1 O2 O3 O4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9
b outputs used: O1 to O4 27D-1 27D-1 b b
b shunt coils: O1 to O3 27D-2 27D-2 b b b
b undervoltage coils: O4 27R 27R b b
b impulse mode: no (latched).
27-1 27-1 b b
Program logic 27-2 27-2 b b b
b circuit breaker control: no
27S-1 27S-1 b b b
b assignment of logic inputs: not used.
27S-2 27S-2 b b b
General characteristics
27S-3 27S-3 b b b
b network frequency: 50 Hz
59-1 59-1 b b
b enable remote setting: no
b working language: English 59-2 59-2 b b b
b primary rated voltage (Unp): 20 kV 59N-1 59N-1 b b
b secondary rated voltage (Uns): 100 V 59N-2 59N-2 b b b
b voltages measured by VTs: V1, V2, V3 81H 81H b b b
b residual voltage: sum of 3Vs 81L-1 81L-1 b b
b pre-trig for disturbance recording: 36 periods.
81L-2 81L-2 b b b
81R b b b

b disturbance recording triggering upon signal pick-up

b watchdog on output O4.

Indicator marking
L1 : U < 27
L2 : U < 27D
L3 : U < 27R
L4 : U > 59
L5 : U > 59N
L6 : F > 81H
L7 : F < 81L
L8 : F << 81L
L9 : Trip

(1) Type B21 performs the same functions as cancelled type B20.

7/14
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 15 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Commissioning: principles and

method

Protection relay testing

Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning, with the dual aim of maximizing
availability and minimizing the risk of malfunctioning of the assembly being
commissioned. The problem consists of defining the consistency of the appropriate
tests, keeping in mind that the relay is always involved as the main link in the
protection chain.
Therefore, protection relays based on electromechanical and static technologies
must be systematically submitted to detailed testing, not only to qualify relay
commissioning, but also to check that they actually are in good operating order and
maintain the required level of performance.
The Sepam concept makes it possible to do away with such testing, since:
b the use of digital technology guarantees the reproducibility of the performances
announced
b each of the Sepam functions has undergone full factory-qualification
b an internal self-testing system provides continuous information on the state of the
electronic components and the integrity of the functions (e.g. automatic tests
diagnose the level of component polarization voltages, the continuity of the analog
value acquisition chain, non-alteration of RAM memory, absence of settings outside
the tolerance range) and thereby guarantees a high level of availability.
Sepam is therefore ready to operate without requiring any additional
qualification testing that concerns it directly.

Sepam commissioning tests

The preliminary Sepam commissining tests may be limited to a commissioning
check, i.e.:
b checking of compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules
during a preliminary general check
b checking of the compliance of the general settings and protection settings entered
with the setting sheets
b checking of current or voltage input connection by secondary injection tests
b checking of logic input and output connection by simulation of input data and
forcing of output status
b confirmation of the complete protection chain
b checking of the connection of the optional MET148-2 and MSA141 modules.
The various checks are described further on.

General principles
b all the tests should be carried out with the MV cubicle completely isolated
and the MV circuit breaker racked out (disconnected and open)
b all the tests are to be performed in the operating situation: no wiring or
setting changes, even temporary changes to facilitate testing, are allowed.

b the SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software is the basic tool for all
Sepam users. It is especially useful during Sepam commissioning tests. The tests
described in this document are systematically based on the use of that tool.
The commissioning tests may be performed without the SFT2841 software for
Sepam units with advanced UMIs. 7
Method
For each Sepam:
b only carry out the checks suited to the hardware configuration and the functions
activated
(A comprehensive description of all the tests is given further on)
b use the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests.

7/15
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 16 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Testing and metering equipment

required

Generators
b sinusoidal AC current generator:
v 50 or 60 Hz frequency (according to the country)
v single-phase type, adjustable from 0 to 50 A rms
v with connector suited to the built-in test terminal box in the current input connection
diagram
b sinusoidal AC voltage generator:
v 50 or 60 Hz frequency (according to the country)
v single-phase type, adjustable from 0 to 150 V rms
v with connector suited to the built-in test terminal box in the voltage input
connection diagram
b DC voltage generator:
v adjustable from 48 to 250 V DC
v for adaptation to the voltage level of the input being tested
v with electric cord and clamps, wire grip or touch probes.

Metering devices
b 1 ammeter, 0 to 50 A rms
b 1 voltmeter, 0 to 150 V rms.

Computer equipment
b PC with minimal configuration:
v MicroSoft Windows 98 / XP / 2000 / NT 4.0
v 133 MHz Pentium processor
v 64 MB of RAM (or 32 MB with Windows 98)
v 64 MB free on hard disk
v CD-ROM drive
b SFT2841 software
b CCA783 serial connection cord between the PC and Sepam.

Documents
b complete connection diagram of Sepam and additional modules, with:
v phase current input connection to the corresponding CTs via the test terminal box
v residual current input connection
v phase voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box
v residual voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal
box
v logic input and output connection
v temperature sensor connection
v analog output connection
b hardware BOMs and installation rules
b group of Sepam parameter and protection settings, available in paper format.

7/16
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 17 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning General examination and

preliminary actions

Checking to be done prior to energizing

Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment, use the diagrams and BOMs
provided by the contractor to check:
b identification of Sepam and accessories determined by the contractor
b correct earthing of Sepam (via terminal 17 of the 20-pin connector)
b conformity of Sepam auxiliary voltage (indicated on the label stuck to the right side
plate of the base unitbase unit) with the auxiliary supply voltage of the switchboard
(or cubicle)
b correct connection of the auxiliary voltage (terminal 1: AC or positive polarity;
terminal 2: AC or negative polarity)
b presence of a residual current measurement core balance CT and/or additional
modules connected to Sepam, when applicable
b presence of test terminal boxes upstream from the current inputs and voltage
inputs
b conformity of connections between Sepam terminals and the test terminal boxes.

Connections
Check that the connections are tightened (with equipment non-energized).
The Sepam connectors must be correctly plugged in and locked.

Energizing
Switch on the auxiliary power supply.
Check that Sepam performs the following initialization sequence, which lasts
approximately 6 seconds:
b green ON and red indicators on
b red indicator off
b pick-up of "watchdog" contact.
The first screen displayed is the phase current or phase voltage metering screen
according to the application.

Implementation of the SFT2841 software for PC

b start up the PC
b connect the PC RS232 serial port to the communication port on the front panel of
Sepam using the CCA783 cord
b start up the SFT2841 software, by clicking on the related icon
b choose to connect to the Sepam to be checked.

Identification of Sepam
b note the Sepam serial number given on the label stuck to the right side plate of the
base unit
b note the Sepam type and software version using the SFT2841 software, "Sepam
Diagnosis" screen
b enter them in the test sheet.

7/17
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 18 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Checking of parameter and

protection settings

Determination of parameter and protection settings

All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings are determined ahead of time by
the design department in charge of the application, and should be approved by the
customer.
It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary, or
even consolidated by a network coordination study.
All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings should be available at the time of
commissioning:
b in paper file format (with the SFT2841 software, the parameter and protection
setting file for a Sepam may be printed directly or exported in a text file for editing)
b and, when applicable, in the format of a file to be downloaded into Sepam using
the SFT2841 software.

Checking of parameters and protection settings

Check to be made when the Sepam parameter and protection settings have not been
entered or downloaded during commissioning testing, to confirm the conformity of
the parameter and protection settings entered with the values determined during the
study.
The aim of this check is not to confirm the relevance of the parameter and protection
settings.
b go through all the parameter and protection setting screens in the SFT2841
software, in the order proposed in guided mode
b for each screen, compare the values entered in the Sepam with the values
recorded in the parameter and protection setting file
b correct any parameter and protection settings that have not been entered correctly,
proceeding as indicated in the SFT2841 software section of the Use chapter of this
manual.

Conclusion
Once the checking has been done and proven to be conclusive, as of that phase, the
parameter and protection settings should not be changed any further and are
considered to be final.
In order to be conclusive, the tests which follow must be performed with these
parameter and protection settings; no temporary modification of any of the values
entered, with the aim of facilitating a test, is permissible.

7/18
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 19 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Checking of phase current input

connection

Description:
Check to be carried out for Sepam S20, T20 or M20.

Procedure:
b to inject a current into the phase 1 input, connect the single-phase generator to the
test terminal box using the plug provided, in accordance with the diagram below:

DE50567

b turn on the generator

b inject the CT rated secondary current, i.e. 1 A or 5 A
7
b use the SFT2841 software to check that the phase 1 current value is approximately
equal to the CT rated primary current
b if the residual current is calculated by taking the sum of the 3 phase currents, use
the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal
to the CT rated primary current
b if the residual current is measured via 3 phase CTs connected to a CSH30
interposing ring CT, use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current
value is approximately equal to the CT rated primary current
b turn off the generator
b proceed in the same way for the other 2 phase current inputs
b at the end of the test, put the cover back on the test terminal box.

7/19
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 20 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Checking of residual current input

connection

Description:
Check to be carried out for Sepam S20, T20 or M20, when the residual current is
measured by a specific sensor:
b CSH120 or CSH200 core balance CT
b another core balance CT connected to an ACE990 interface
b a single 1 A or 5 A CT encompassing the 3 phases, connected to a CSH30
interposing ring CT.

Procedure:
b connect the single-phase current generator to inject current into the primary circuit
of the core balance CT or the CT, in accordance with the diagram below:
DE50340

7
b turn on the generator
b inject a 5 A primary residual current
b use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately
equal to 5 A
b turn the generator off.

7/20
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 21 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Checking phase voltage input

connection

Description:
Check to be carried out for Sepam B21 or B22.

Procedure:
b to apply a phase-to-neutral voltage to the phase 1 voltage input, connect the
single-phase voltage generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided, in
ccordance with the diagram below:

DE51136

b turn the generator on

7
b apply the VT rated secondary phase-to-neutral voltage (Uns/3)
b use the SFT2841 software to check that the phase-to-neutral voltage V1 value is
equal to the VT rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage (Unp/3)
b if the residual voltage is calculated by the sum of the 3 voltages, use the SFT2841
software to check that the residual voltage is approximately equal to the VT rated
primary phase-to-neutral voltage (Unp/√3)
b turn the generator off
b proceed in the same way for the other 2 phase voltage inputs
b at the end of the test, put the cover back on the test terminal box.

7/21
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 22 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Checking of residual voltage input

connection

Description:
Check to be carried out for Sepam B21 or B22, when the residual voltage is
measured by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta
arrangement.

Procedure:
b connect the single-phase voltage generator to the terminal test box using the plug
DE51137 provided, in accordance with the diagram below:

7
b turn on the generator
b apply the VT rated secondary phase-to-neutral voltage (Uns/3)
b use the SFT2841 software to check the residual voltag value Vo
b Vo should be equal to the VT rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage (Unp/3 or
Vnp) if the VTs deliver Uns/3 to the secondary circuit
b Vo should be equal to the VT rated primary phase-to-phase voltage (Unp or
3Vnp) if the VTs deliver Uns/3 to the secondary circuit
b turn the generator off
b put the cover back on the terminal test box.

7/22
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 23 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Checking of logic input and output

connection

Checking of logic input connection

MT10588

Procedure
Proceed as follows for each input:
b if the input supply voltage is present, use an electric cord to short-circuit the
contact that delivers logic data to the input
b if the input supply voltage is not present, apply a voltage supplied by the DC
voltage generator to the terminal of the contact linked to the chosen input, being sure
to comply with the suitable polarity and level
b observe the change of status of the input using the SFT2841 software, in the
"Input, output, indicator status" screen
b at the end of the test, if necessary, press the Sepam Reset key to clear all
messages and deactivate all outputs.

SFT2841 "Input, output, indicator status" screen.

Checking of logic output connection

MT10589

Procedure
Check carried out using the "Output relay test" function, activated via the SFT2841
software, in the "Sepam Diagnosis" screen.
Only output O4, when used for the watchdog, can be tested.
This function requires prior entry of the "Parameter setting" password.
b activate each output relay using the buttons in the SFT2841 software
b the activated output relay changes status over a period of 5 seconds
b observe the change of status of the output relay through the operation of the
related switchgear (if it is ready to operate and is powered), or connect a voltmeter to
the terminals of the output contact (the voltage cancels itself out when the contact
closes)
b at the end of the test, press the Sepam Reset key to clear all messages and
deactivate all outputs.
SFT2841 "Sepam Diagnosis - output relay test" screen.

7/23
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 24 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Validation of the complete

protection chain

Principle:
The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that causes
tripping of the breaking device by Sepam.

Procedure:
b select one of the protection functions that triggers the breaking device
b according to the type of Sepam, inject a fault current or voltage
b observe the tripping of the breaking device.

7/24
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 25 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Checking of optional module

connection

Checking of temperature sensor inputs to

the MET148-2 module
The temperature monitoring function provided by Sepam T20 or M20 units checks
the connection of each sensor that is configured.
An "RTD FAULT" alarm is generated whenever one of the sensors is detected as
being short-circuited or disconnected (absent).
To identify the faulty sensor or sensors:
b display the temperature values measured by Sepam T20 or M20 using the
SFT2841 software
b check the consistency of the temperatures measured:
v the temperature displayed is "****" if the sensor is short-circuited (T < -35 °C)
v the temperature displayed is "-****" if the sensor is disconnected (T > 205 °C).

Checking of analog output connection to the

MSA141 module
b identify the measurement associated by parameter setting to the analog output
using the SFT2841 software
b simulate, if necessary, the measurement linked to the analog output by injection
b check the consistency between the value measured by Sepam and the indication
given by the device connected to the analog output.

7/25
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 26 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Test sheet

Sepam series 20

Project: Type of Sepam

Switchboard: Serial number

Cubicle: Software version V

Overall checks
Check of the box v when the check has been made and been conclusive
Type of check
Preliminary general examination, prior to energizing v
Energizing v
Parameter and protection settings v
Logic input connection v
Logic output connection v
Validation of the complete protection chain v
Analog output connection to the MSA141 module v
Temperature sensor input connection to the MET148-2 module (for type T20 or M20) v
Checking of Sepam S20, T20 or M20 current inputs
Type of check Test performed Result Display
Phase current input Secondary injection of CT CT rated primary current
connection rated current, i.e. 1 A or 5 A I1 = v

I2 =

I3 =
Residual current value Secondary injection of CT CT rated primary current
obtained by 3 phase CTs rated current, i.e. 1 A or 5 A I0 = v
Residual current input Injection of 5 A into primary Injected current value
connection to a specific circuit of core balance CT or I0 = v
sensor: CT
b CSH120 or CSH200
b other core balance CT +
ACE990
b 1 x 1 A or 5 A CT + CSH30
Checking of Sepam B21 or B22 voltage inputs
7 Type of check
Phase voltage input
Test performed
Secondary injection of VT
Result
VT rated primary phase-to-neutral
Display

connection rated phase-to-neutral voltage Unp/3 V1 = v

voltage Uns/3
V2 =

V3 =
Residual voltage value Secondary injection of VT VT rated primary phase-to-neutral
obtained by 3 phase VTs rated phase-to-neutral voltage Unp/3 V0 = v
voltage Uns/3
Connection of residual Secondary injection of Residual voltage
voltage input voltage Uns/3 = Unp/3 (if Uns/3 VT) V0 = v
= Unp (if Uns/3 VT)

Tests performed on: Signatures

By:
Comments:

7/26
PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 27 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Maintenance

Sepam has a large number of self-tests that are carried Shutdown of the base unit in fail-safe position
out in the base unit and additional modules. The The base unit goes into the fail-safe position in the following conditions:
purpose of the self-tests is: b detection of an internal failure by the self-tests
b to detect failures that may lead to nuisance tripping b sensor interface connector missing (CCA630, CCA670 or CCA640 according to
or the failure to trip when a fault occurs the type of application)
b to put Sepam in the fail-safe position to avoid user b no connection of one of the 3 LPCT sensors to the CCA670 (connectors L1, L2
errors and L3)
b to notify the operator that a maintenance operation is b MES module configured but missing.
required.
The "Sepam diagnosis" screen of the SFT2841 The fail-safe position is conveyed by:
software provides access to data on the status of the b ON indicator on
base unit and optional modules. b indicator on the basis unit steadily on
b relay O4 "watchdog" in fault position
b output relays dropped out
b all protection units inhibited
MT10587

b display showing fault message

01

b indicator on DSM303 module (remote advanced UMI option) flashing.

Downgraded operation
The base unit is in working order (all the protection functions activated are
operational) and indicates that one of the optional modules such as DSM303,
MET148-2 or MSA141 is faulty or else that a module is configured but not connected.
According to the model, this operating mode is conveyed by:
SFT2841 "Sepam Diagnosis" screen. b Sepam with integrated advanced UMI (UD base):
v ON indicator on
v indicator on the base unit flashing, including when the display is out of order
(off)
v indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty, steadily on.
The display shows a partial fault message and indicates the type of fault by a code:
v code 1: inter-module link fault
v code 3: MET module unavailable
v code 4: MSA module unavailable.
b Sepam with remote advanced UMI, UX base + DSM303:
v ON indicator on
v indicator on the base unit flashing
v indicator on the MET or MSA module faulty, steadily on
v the display indicates the type of fault by a code (same as above).
Special case of faulty DSM303:
v ON indicator on
v indicator on base unit flashing
v indicator on DSM steadily on
v display off.
7
This Sepam operating mode is also transmitted via the communication link.

Temperature sensor fault

Each temperature monitoring function, when activated, detects whether the
temperature sensor associated with the MET148-2 module is short-circuited or
disconnected.
When this is the case, the alarm message "RTD FAULT" is generated.
Since this alarm is common to the 8 functions, the identification of the faulty sensor
or sensors is obtained by looking up the measured values:
b measurement displayed "****" if the sensor is short-circuited (T < -35 °C)
b measurement displayed "-****" if the sensor is disconnected (or T > +205 °C).

Replacement and repair

When Sepam or a module is considered to be faulty, have it replaced by a new
product or module, since the components cannot be repaired.

7/27
 PCRED301005EN_7-Use_2004.FM Page 28 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 3:11 15

Commissioning Notes

7/28
 YFJYVIIVGIT

6FKQHLGHU(OHFWULF )55(9$
PCRED301005EN_1-Couv_2004.FM Page 3 Vendredi, 23. juillet 2004 1:59 13

03146730EN-G0 © 2004 Schneider Electric - All rights reserved

Schneider Electric Industries SAS

89, boulevard Franklin Roosevelt As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation
F - 92500 Rueil-Malmaison (France) of the information given in this publication.
Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 85 00
This document has been printed
http://www.schneider-electric.com on ecological paper.
http://www.sepamrelay.merlin-gerin.com
Design: Ameg
Publication: Schneider Electric
Printed:
PCRED301005EN/2 06-2004
ART.08552